WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction
Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................................14
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................108
4STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................133
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................199
6SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................260
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................310
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................331
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................391
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ....................................................................................................400
11INDEX............................................................................................................................................405
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY.......................................................................9
ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................................9
CAMPERS.............................................................................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......................10
SYMBOL GLOSSARY...........................................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................14
Key Fob........................................................................ 14
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................16
IGNITION SWITCH ..............................................................17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .................18
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 18
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 19
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ......... 19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 20
Remote Start Cancel Message .................................. 20
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ......................20
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................21
To Arm The System .................................................... 21
To Disarm The System ............................................... 21
Rearming Of The System............................................ 22
DOORS ................................................................................22
Manual Door Locks......................................................22
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...............................22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ................................................................23
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........................25
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.....25
Front Door Removal ....................................................25
Rear Door Removal ....................................................29
Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped ...............................31
Half-Doors — If Equipped.............................................32
STEERING WHEEL............................................................... 39
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............................39
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .......................39
SEATS ..................................................................................39
Manual Adjustment Front Seats.................................40
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................41
Rear Seat Stadium Position........................................42
Heated Seats — If Equipped .......................................43
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped ...............................43
Head Restraints ..........................................................44
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION .................................... 45
Introducing Voice Recognition....................................45
Basic Voice Commands...............................................46
Get Started...................................................................46
Additional Information.................................................46
MIRRORS .............................................................................46
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................46
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..........................................47
Outside Mirrors ...........................................................47
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ......................................48
Outside Mirrors With Turn
Signal — If Equipped....................................................48
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ....................................48
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) .................................................................... 48
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 49
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 49
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 49
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener ................................................................ 49
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 50
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 50
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 50
Security ........................................................................ 51
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 51
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................. 52
Headlight Switch.......................................................... 52
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped ......... 52
High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 53
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .................................................................. 53
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 53
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 53
Lights-On Reminder..................................................... 53
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................. 53
Turn Signals................................................................. 54
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............................. 54
Bed Lights — If Equipped ........................................... 54
INTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 54
Interior Courtesy Lights............................................... 54
Dimmer Control ........................................................... 55
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......................... 55
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 55
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
CLIMATE CONTROLS ..........................................................56
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions.............................................................. 56
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions.............................................................. 59
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ................................................................. 60
Climate Voice Commands .......................................... 61
Operating Tips ............................................................ 61
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............................62
Storage ........................................................................ 62
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped............................. 64
AUX/USB Control ........................................................ 65
Jeep® Wireless Speaker —
If Equipped .................................................................. 66
Power Outlets ............................................................. 71
Power Inverters — If Equipped .................................. 72
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ............................... 73
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED..................................74
Auto-Down Feature .................................................... 75
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped ............. 75
Window Lockout Switch.............................................. 75
Wind Buffeting ............................................................ 76
GLADIATOR TOPS ..............................................................76
Provided Tools............................................................. 76
Lowering The Soft Top ................................................ 77
Raising The Soft Top................................................... 83
Removing The Soft Top............................................... 86
Installing The Soft Top ................................................ 86
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal.............................. 88
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation.......................... 91
Removing The Hard Top ............................................. 91
Installing The Hard Top............................................... 93
Sunrider® For Hard Top —
If Equipped...................................................................93
DOOR FRAME — IF EQUIPPED WITH A SOFT TOP ......... 96
Door Frame Removal...................................................96
Door Frame Installation...............................................97
FOLDING WINDSHIELD .....................................................98
Lowering The Windshield ............................................98
Raising The Windshield............................................ 100
HOOD ................................................................................ 101
Opening The Hood .................................................... 101
Closing The Hood...................................................... 101
TAILGATE .......................................................................... 101
Opening ..................................................................... 101
Three-Position Tailgate............................................. 102
Closing....................................................................... 103
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 103
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ................................. 104
Tonneau Cover Installation...................................... 104
Tonneau Cover Removal.......................................... 106
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ....................... 107
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
GASOLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS ............................. 108
Instrument Cluster Descriptions.............................. 110
DIESEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS .................................. 111
Instrument Cluster Descriptions.............................. 113
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.................................. 113
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls.............................................................. 114
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped .................................... 114
Off Road+ Display — If Equipped............................. 115
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items ..........115
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..................116
Battery Saver On, Battery Saver Mode
Message, And Electrical Load Reduction
Actions (If Equipped).................................................118
Diesel Displays ..........................................................119
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages ................120
Fuel System Messages .............................................121
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..............................122
Red Warning Lights...................................................122
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................................125
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................128
Green Indicator Lights...............................................129
White Indicator Lights ...............................................130
Blue Indicator Lights .................................................131
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...................131
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .............................................................132
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.......................................................................132
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................................................................133
Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......................133
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...................133
Normal Starting ........................................................133
AutoPark ....................................................................134
Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ........................................135
Extended Park Starting .............................................135
If Engine Fails To Start .............................................135
After Starting..............................................................135
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................. 136
Automatic Transmission........................................... 136
Extreme Cold Weather..............................................136
Normal Starting......................................................... 137
Starting Fluids ........................................................... 137
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ..................... 137
Cold Weather Precautions........................................ 138
Engine Idling.............................................................. 138
Stopping The Engine................................................. 139
Cooling System Tips — Automatic Transmission.....139
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ................................ 140
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ...................................... 140
PARKING BRAKE ............................................................ 141
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ................... 142
Shifting.......................................................................142
Downshifting.............................................................. 143
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 144
Ignition Park Interlock...............................................145
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ...................................................................... 145
8–Speed Automatic Transmission .......................... 145
Gear Ranges.............................................................. 146
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ............................... 149
Four-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped .............149
Five-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped ............. 151
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ............................ 152
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear —
If Equipped ............................................................... 153
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only — If Equipped .......... 153
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped ..... 154
OFF ROAD+ — If Equipped........................................ 155
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.................... 156
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) .................................... 156
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 156
Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop ............................................................. 157
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ......... 157
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System......... 158
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System ......... 158
System Malfunction.................................................. 158
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED) .................................................................. 158
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 159
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .................................................................... 159
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode ......... 159
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System......... 160
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System ......... 160
System Malfunction.................................................. 160
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ............. 160
Cruise Control .......................................................... 160
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................................. 162
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................................ 170
ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 170
ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 170
ParkSense Display ....................................................170
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense..........................173
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System ............173
Cleaning The ParkSense System .............................173
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....................173
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...........................174
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............................176
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................................................................177
Fuel Filler Cap ...........................................................177
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................................178
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................................................................178
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel ...............................179
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel...............................179
Diesel Exhaust Fluid .................................................179
VEHICLE LOADING ...........................................................181
Certification Label .....................................................181
TRAILER TOWING ............................................................182
Common Towing Definitions.....................................182
Trailer Hitch Classification........................................185
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........................185
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................................187
Towing Requirements ...............................................187
Towing Tips ................................................................189
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)......190
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........190
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models...191
DRIVING TIPS....................................................................192
On-Road Driving Tips.................................................192
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................................192
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 199
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 199
UCONNECT SETTINGS...................................................... 199
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 200
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION............................................ 215
System Overview ...................................................... 215
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ............................................ 217
Safety And General Information ..............................217
UCONNECT MODES.......................................................... 218
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............................218
Radio Mode .............................................................. 219
Media Mode ............................................................. 227
Phone Mode ............................................................. 229
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 238
Android Auto™ .......................................................... 238
Apple CarPlay® ......................................................... 240
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks .................................................................. 241
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 242
Is My Vehicle Connected? ........................................ 242
Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services .......... 242
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .................................................................... 243
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ......................................245
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account ............. 253
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ....................................... 253
Connected Services SOS FAQs —
If Equipped ............................................................... 254
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock
FAQs .......................................................................... 254
Connected Services Roadside Assistance FAQs .... 254
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped ............................................................... 254
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs .............. 255
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped ............................... 255
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs ................................................................ 255
Connected Services Remote Horn &
Lights FAQs ............................................................... 256
Connected Services Account FAQs —
If Equipped................................................................ 256
Data Collection & Privacy......................................... 257
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ................. 258
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 258
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 258
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ...................................... 258
Drivetrain................................................................... 259
Accessory Gauge ...................................................... 259
Pitch & Roll ............................................................... 259
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................260
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................260
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..................261
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................................267
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ...........267
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ...........................................271
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...............273
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................................277
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...................277
Important Safety Precautions...................................278
Seat Belt Systems ....................................................278
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................284
Child Restraints ........................................................296
SAFETY TIPS .....................................................................306
Transporting Passengers ..........................................306
Transporting Pets .....................................................307
Connected Vehicles...................................................307
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...............................................................307
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ..................................................309
Exhaust Gas ..............................................................309
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ....................................309
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .................................... 310
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................. 310
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING...................................... 313
Preparations For Jacking ......................................... 313
Jack Location ............................................................ 314
Spare Tire Location And Removal ........................... 315
Jacking Instructions ................................................. 317
To Stow The Flat Or Spare........................................ 319
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools............................... 320
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 321
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 321
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 322
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED ............... 324
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................................ 325
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — IF EQUIPPED .................... 325
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ........................................... 327
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ..................................... 328
Four–Wheel Drive Models........................................329
Without The Key Fob................................................. 329
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ..................... 329
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .............................................................................. 330
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE ENGINE ........... 331
Maintenance Plan..................................................... 332
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE ................ 335
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To
B5 Biodiesel.............................................................. 336
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20 Biodiesel .... 338
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................................... 339
3.6L Gasoline Engine .............................................. 339
3.0L Diesel Engine.................................................... 340
Checking Oil Level .................................................... 341
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 341
Maintenance-Free Battery ...................................... 341
Pressure Washing..................................................... 342
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................. 342
Engine Oil ................................................................. 342
Engine Oil Filter ........................................................ 343
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 343
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine ........................................................... 345
Fuel Filter Replacement — Diesel Engine ............... 345
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel —
Diesel Engine ........................................................... 347
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow ............................................ 347
Diesel Exhaust Fluid .................................................348
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............................348
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................348
Body Lubrication .......................................................350
Windshield Wiper Blades .........................................350
Exhaust System ........................................................351
Cooling System..........................................................352
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler
(Diesel Engine) ..........................................................355
Brake System ...........................................................355
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................................355
Transfer Case ...........................................................356
Manual Transmission — If Equipped........................356
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...................356
Fuses .........................................................................357
Bulb Replacement ....................................................366
TIRES..................................................................................369
Tire Safety Information ............................................369
Tires — General Information ....................................375
Tire Types...................................................................379
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................379
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................................380
Snow Traction Devices .............................................382
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................383
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................................. 383
Treadwear.................................................................. 384
Traction Grades......................................................... 384
Temperature Grades................................................. 384
STORING THE VEHICLE ................................................... 384
BODYWORK ...................................................................... 385
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ..................... 385
Body And Underbody Maintenance ......................... 386
Preserving The Bodywork ......................................... 386
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 387
Carpet Safety Information ........................................ 387
Carpet Removal......................................................... 388
Seats And Fabric Parts ............................................. 389
Plastic And Coated Parts .......................................... 390
Leather Surfaces.......................................................390
Glass Surfaces .........................................................390
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 391
BRAKE SYSTEM .............................................................. 391
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ............. 391
Torque Specifications............................................... 391
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE .............. 392
3.6L Engine............................................................... 392
Reformulated Gasoline ........................................... 392
Materials Added To Fuel ......................................... 392
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ................................... 392
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ............ 393
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 393
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline................................. 393
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 393
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE .................... 394
Diesel Fuel Specifications........................................ 394
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements................................... 394
FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................... 396
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................. 397
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................ 399
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................400
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................400
Prepare A List ............................................................400
Be Reasonable With Requests.................................400
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................................400
Roadside Assistance.................................................400
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................................401
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................402
Mexico........................................................................402
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........................402
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).....................................402
Service Contract .......................................................402
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................402
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................403
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................403
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........403
In Canada...................................................................403
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................403
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................404
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................404
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to operate this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or a collision. See
Ú page 192 for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information that may or may
not be applicable to your vehicle will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All information contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims towards a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or
commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of
the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to
the topic.
1
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
CAMPERS
This vehicle is NOT recommended for slide-in camper applications.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 122.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 122
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 122
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 123
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 123
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 123
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 123
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 124
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 124
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 124
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 124
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 124
Red Warning Lights
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 124
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 124
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 125
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 125
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 125
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 125
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 125
Red Warning Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 126
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 126
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 126
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 126
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 126
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 126
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 126
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 127
Yellow Warning Lights
1
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light
Ú page 128
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 128
4WD Part Time Indicator Light
Ú page 128
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 128
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 128
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 128
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 128
Neutral Indicator Light
Ú page 128
Sway Bar Indicator Light
Ú page 128
Off Road+ Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Cargo Light On Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Wait To Start Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Yellow Indicator Lights
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Green Indicator Lights
4WD Auto Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 129
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 130
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 130
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
Ú page 130
White Indicator Lights
Two-Wheel Drive High Indicator Light
Ú page 130
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
Ú page 130
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light
Ú page 130
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light
Ú page 131
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) Indicator Light
Ú page 131
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 131
1
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start
(if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or
unlock the doors and tailgate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The key fob also contains a mechanical key.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands
are disabled.
Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery condition may
be indicated by a message in the instrument cluster
display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob button
pushes, then the key fob battery requires replacement.
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be harmful
to the environment. Please see an authorized dealer
for proper battery disposal
Ú page 404.
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only with the
key fob facing away from your body, especially your eyes
and objects that may be damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key fob may be
damaged if the key fob is subjected to strong electrical
shocks. In order to ensure complete effectiveness of
the electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid
exposing the key fob to direct sunlight.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — LED Indicator
3 — Unlock Button
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button (If Equipped)
6 — Panic Button
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all the doors.
To lock all the doors, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 199.
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock
the doors, tailgate, glove compartment, storage
compartments (if equipped), and rear seatbacks.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual
alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to check for the presence of a key fob; the
Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the
doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be
indicated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster, and the
fob LED will no longer illuminate with a button push.
1. Remove the back cover of the key fob by inserting a
flat-blade screwdriver into the slot on the bottom of
the fob. Apply light pressure until the cover unsnaps
being careful not to damage the seal. Proceed
counterclockwise (in the order shown in the
following image) to loosen the remaining snaps until
the battery cover can be removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small
flat-blade screwdriver into the battery removal slot
and sliding the battery forward and upward being
careful not to damage the electronic board
underneath.
Battery Replacement
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure
the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery
until it is seated securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly
aligned before snapping it back in place.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb
check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the
light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine
but there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine
will start and shut off after two seconds.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition in the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 404.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a START/STOP ignition button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available
(power windows, etc.).
RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of the START/STOP ignition button, the key fob may have
a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
nose side of the key fob (side with the mechanical flip key)
against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — RUN
CAUTION!
Do not press the mechanical key against the
START/STOP ignition button.
Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screwdriver etc.)
to pry the button out of the ignition switch. This
button comes as an assembly, and is not removable.
This can damage the silicone shield.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Do Not Use Mechanical Key
NOTE:
When opening the driver's door with the ignition in the
ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will sound
to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the message will display “Ignition
Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range Ú page 404.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and tailgate
will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will
chirp twice (if equipped). Pushing the Remote Start button
again will shut the engine off.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction Indicator Light not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button on the
key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute
cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the
settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section
for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will also
turn on if programmed in the Comfort menu screen within
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 199.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an optimal
temperature and mode, dependent upon the outside
ambient temperature. When the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume their
previous settings.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode,
and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 56.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control settings will change if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
remote start mode. This includes turning the climate
controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and
operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or
exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Tailgate Open
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait To Start
yellow telltale to extinguish before cranking the engine
Ú page 122. This allows time for the engine preheat
cycle to heat the cylinder air, and is normal in cold
weather.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors and tailgate
will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will
chirp twice. Pushing the Remote Start button again will
shut the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction Indicator/Check Engine telltale is
not illuminated
Water In Fuel telltale is not illuminated
Wait To Start telltale is not illuminated
For additional Remote Start information, see
Ú page 19.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the system is activated, the
interior switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle
Security system provides both audible and visible signals.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and visible
signals: the horn will pulse, the parking lights and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 23.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
Ú page 23.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF posi-
tion.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door
lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push
the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the
door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the
door cylinders, tailgate, glove compartment, and storage
compartments (if equipped).
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the doors, and
rearward to lock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a colli-
sion, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as well as
when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in
the OFF position and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and tailgate without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings Ú page 199.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
interfere with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates Headlight Illumination
On Approach (low beams, license plate lamp, parking
lights) for whichever duration is set within the Uconnect
Settings between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive
Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn signal
lights.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock
and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle
will unlock all doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 199.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in a
collision, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always place the ignition in
the OFF position and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function only if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are closed, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer. If Passive Entry
is disabled using the Uconnect system, the key fob
protection described in this section remains active/
functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-Safe
operation when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
A second valid Passive Entry key fob is detected
outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a
Passive Entry door handle).
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch, and then the doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the
vehicle doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
When pushing the door handle lock button, DO NOT grab
the door handle. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, the driver must
wait three seconds before locking or unlocking the
doors, using any Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow the driver to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle without the vehicle
unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect system,
the key fob protection described in “Preventing Inad-
vertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle”
remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted
Ú page 404.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock feature can be
enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written
request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer
for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, temporarily
remove the sealing plug for access, and use a flat-blade
screwdriver (or mechanical key) to rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock lever rearward (located on the door trim panel),
lower the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
Door Removal Warning Label
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors
removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only. Failure to follow this warning
can result in death or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For information on
off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 192.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as they
may cause personal injury in the event of an accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to
the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted
on the doors. If you choose to remove
the doors, see an authorized dealer for
a replacement cowl-mounted outside
mirror. Federal law requires outside
mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
NOTE:
When front doors are removed, the message
“Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will display
in the instrument cluster display. Power Mirrors and
Power Door Locks will also be unavailable.
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nut from the upper and lower
outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin
located under the rear seat.
Hinge Pin Nut
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the
instrument panel by sliding the plastic panel along
the door frame toward the seats until the tabs are
detached.
Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring
harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). For informa-
tion on off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 192.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
1 — Red Locking Tab
2 — Wiring Harness Lever (Closed Position)
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
5. Push and hold down the black security tab under the
wiring harness, and lift the harness lever into the
open position.
Open Wiring Harness
6. With the wiring harness open, pull straight downward
on the wiring connector to unplug. Store the wiring
connector in the lower door basket.
7. With the door in the open position, remove the check
screw from the door check attachment on the body
side (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier
reinstallation. See note below if the check arm gets
pushed into the door while the door is off.
Door Check Arm
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To Install The Front Doors
1. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the door,
and lower them into the body hinges on the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to assist
in guiding the door into place during installation.
Hinge Pin Locations
2. With the door in the open position, align the door
check bracket with the hole on the body. Insert the
check screw and tighten using a #40 Torx head driver
to 19.9 ft· lb (27.0 N·m).
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
NOTE:
If the check arm is stuck inside the door, follow these
instructions to install the check arm.
1 — Wiring Harness Lever (Open Position)
2 — Black Security Tab
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
1. Insert the check arm screw into the check arm
bracket. Ensure the screw is in the correct
orientation.
2. Slowly pull on the screw to draw the check arm out
until you encounter increased resistance. Do not
attempt to pull the check arm all the way out.
3. While sitting inside the vehicle, hold the door partially
closed and insert the screw into the hole on the body.
4. Using your fingers, turn the screw clockwise at least
two full turns. Gently pull on the screw to ensure it is
secure.
5. Using the door handle, slowly push the door open.
The check arm will be pulled out of the door.
You may hear the check arm pop against the screw.
6. Fully tighten the screw as instructed.
Replacing The Wiring Connector Into The Wiring Harness
To reinstall the wiring connector on the vehicle’s door into
the harness just inside the vehicle, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
Make sure there is plenty of slack on the wiring connector
during installation. Close the door slightly to provide more
slack if needed.
1. With light finger pressure, seat the wiring connector
straight
into the wiring harness until the wiring
harness lever starts to lower with the latching pin.
Connecting The Wiring Harness
2. After the harness lever has started to move with the
pressure of seating the wiring connector, continue by
lowering the wiring harness lever to the fully closed
position.
Fully Closed Position
3. Push the red locking tab downward to lock into place.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the door onto the metal hook
just inside the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury be sure to keep your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects clear of the check arm
area during the removal and installation procedures.
CAUTION!
Do not close the door before reattaching the
door check to the body. Damage may occur to
the door check.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
1 — Seat Connector Straight Into Harness
2 — Wiring Harness Lever Starts To Lower
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Failure to correctly reconnect the wiring connector into
the harness will result in damage that is not covered by
the New Vehicle Warranty.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Cloth Strap Attachment
5. Replace wiring access doors.
NOTE:
When reinstalling the door check arm attachment screw,
screw torque should be between 11.76 ft·lb / 16 N·m and
27.9 ft·lb / 38 N·m.
REAR DOOR REMOVAL
Door Removal Warning Label
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To remove the rear doors, proceed as
follows:
1. Roll down the glass window to
prevent any damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin nuts from
the upper and lower outside hinges
(using a #T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin nuts can be stowed in the Fastener Bin
under the rear seat.
Hinge Pin Nut
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors
removed as you will lose the protection they can
provide. This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only. Failure to follow this warning
can result in death or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For information on
off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 192.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as
they may cause personal injury in the event of an
accident.
Assistance to remove doors may by required due to
the weight of the door to avoid personal injury.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). For informa-
tion on off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 192.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access door
from the bottom of the B-pillar.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness.
This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the wiring
connector to be unplugged. Unhook the wire harness strap
from the hook on the body side. Store the wire connector
in the lower basket of the door.
Wiring Connector
6. With the door in the open position, remove the check
bolt from the door check attachment on the body
(using a #T40 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
Keep the check arm in the extended position for easier
reinstallation.
Door Check Arm
7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of
another person, to clear the hinge pins from their
hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in
the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to
assist in guiding the door into place when reinstalling.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury be sure to keep your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects clear of the check arm
area during the removal and installation procedures.
CAUTION!
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 5.88 ft·lb / 8 N·m). For informa-
tion on off-road driving tips, see
Ú page 192.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
DOOR OFF MIRROR KIT — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped with the Door Off Mirror Kit, exterior rearview
mirrors can be installed on to the upper body door hinges
after the front doors have been removed.
Door Off Mirror
To install the Door Off Mirrors, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front doors
Ú
page 25.
2. Remove the cowl bolt closest to the door opening
using a #40 Torx head driver, and store in a safe
location.
Cowl Bolt Location
3. Push the mirror bracket forward onto the A-pillar,
making sure to align the bottom of the bracket with
the upper door hinge, and the hole from the removed
cowl bolt.
Push Bracket Onto A-pillar
4. Place the bracket bushing behind the mirror bracket
(over the cowl bolt hole), then insert the bracket bolt
into the mirror bracket, through the bracket bushing.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road
operation with doors removed. For off-road driving
tips, see
Ú page 192.
Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as
they may fly around and cause personal injury or
death in the event of a sudden stop, rough terrain, or
a collision.
1 — Bracket Bushing
2 — Bracket Bolt
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Insert the hinge shoulder bolt through the bottom of
the upper door hinge up into the mirror bracket, then
rotate the bracket knob toward the rear of the vehicle
to secure the mirror bracket to the A-pillar.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle
6. Tighten both the bracket bolt and the hinge shoulder
bolt with a #40 Torx head driver. Recommended
torque specification for the bracket bolt is 6 ft-lb
(8 N·m), and 7.5 ft-lb (10 N·m) for the hinge
shoulder bolt.
7. Lower the mirror assembly onto the mirror bracket.
Lower Mirror Assembly Onto Bracket
8. Insert the three mirror screws into the mirror
assembly, and tighten into the mirror bracket using a
#30 Torx head driver. Recommended torque specifi-
cation for the mirror screws is 4 ft-lb (5.5 N·m).
Mirror Screw Locations
9. Repeat the steps on the other side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
If this kit is being installed with the optional lamp bracket,
the bracket bushing from step 4 is not needed. Use the
spacer from the lamp bracket.
HALF-DOORS — IF EQUIPPED
1 — Bracket Knob
2 — Hinge Shoulder Bolt
CAUTION!
Do not run half-doors through an automatic car
wash. This may result in scratches and wax buildup
on the windows.
Careless handling and storage of the half-doors may
damage the seals resulting in water leaks into the
interior of the vehicle.
The upper half-doors must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water leaks into the interior of the vehicle.
Store the zipper pulls of the upper half-door windows
at the upper B-pillar area for both front and rear
doors to avoid damage to the windows when
not in use.
Do not attempt to operate the half-door zipper in
temperatures of 41°F (5°C) or below. Damage to the
window may occur.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
This vehicle may be equipped with
half-doors. To install the half-doors in
the vehicle, follow the instruction sheet
packaged in the box the doors were
received in. Replacement parts may be
purchased through Mopar® Service.
Half-Door Installation
To install the front or rear half-doors, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the full doors from the vehicle. For front
door removal, see
Ú
page 25
. For rear door removal,
see
Ú
page 29.
2. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the lower
half-door, and lower them into the body hinges on
the vehicle.
NOTE:
The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to assist
in guiding the door into place during installation.
Lower Half-Door Hinge Pins
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws into the
body hinges. Tighten the screws using a #T50 Torx
head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the lower half-door to the
metal hook just inside the vehicle.
Cloth Strap Attachment
5. Connect the wiring harness on the lower half-door to
the connection just inside the vehicle.
NOTE:
For front doors, make sure the wiring harness is closed
completely.
Front Door Wiring Harness
6. Replace wiring access doors.
CAUTION!
Do not close the door before reattaching the door
check to the body. Damage may occur to the door
check.
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to the
vehicle’s parts will occur.
Hinge pins can break if overtightened during door
install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
1 — Metal Hook
2 — Cloth Strap
1 — Open Wiring Harness
2 — Closed Wiring Harness
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. When the half-doors are shipped with the vehicle, the
lower half-doors will have plugs in the post holes that
must be removed prior to upper half-door installation.
To remove these plugs, proceed as follows:
a. Locate the service hole in the center of each
plug of the lower half-door (two on each front and
rear door).
b. Place a tool (hook tool or trim stick is recom-
mended) in the service hole.
Place Tool Into Service Hole Of Plug To Remove
c. Using the tool, slowly pull upwards from the center
of the plug to remove.
8. Making sure the window on the upper half-door is
completely zipped closed, insert the upper half-door
into the lower half-door by placing the posts into the
post holes.
Lower The Upper Half-Door Into Post Holes
9. Push down firmly on the inside of the upper half-door
until it is fully seated in the lower half.
Push Down To Fully Seat Upper Half-Door
Door Latch Alignment
Check Door Latch And Striker Alignment
NOTE:
Only adjust the door to fit correctly against the striker.
DO NOT adjust the striker, as this could affect the
positioning of the full door.
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly set the
door almost to the closing position and check how the
door latch aligns with the body striker. Touch condition
between these components can result in damage to
both the door and the striker.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
If the door does not center align between the latch and the
striker, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
2. With the bolts loose, hold the door in the almost
closing position, and check that the latch and
striker align.
3. With the latch and striker aligned, proceed to
close the door softly and tighten the hinge bolts to
20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
Lower Door Adjustment
If the door does not latch properly after installation, if
there is interference between the panels, or if a
non-uniform gap around the door is observed when the
door is closed (example: door position appears to be low
and too far rearward), the position of the door on its hinges
may need to be adjusted. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the door
hinges using the provided #T50 Torx head driver.
Hinge Bolt Locations
NOTE:
Do not adjust the body mounted hinges, or any part of the
door latch, as modifications to these parts will affect
installation of the full door.
2. With the bolts loose, the door can be moved forward
by pushing the door handle toward the front of the
vehicle, and/or upward by grabbing the door handle
and lifting towards the roof.
3. Once the gaps between the door and vehicle body are
uniform around the entire door, tighten the door
hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m
(Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
CAUTION!
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly close
each door to check for body contact. Improper setting of
the door hinges can cause extreme non-uniform
conditions, and result in damage to the body around
the door.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Upper Door Adjustment
After installation of the half-doors, if water leaks or wind
noise is observed, the seal of the upper half-door to the
door opening may need to be adjusted.
To determine if the upper half-door needs to be adjusted,
proceed as follows:
1. Determine which door is affected.
2. Open the affected door and hold a dollar-size piece of
paper along the top of the door opening against the
vehicle near where the leak/noise was observed.
Make sure half of the paper is above the area where
the door seal contacts the door opening, while the
other half is below.
3. Close the door on the paper, then pull the paper
upward. If the paper moves with little to no effort, the
upper half-door will need to be adjusted in that area
to increase seal compression.
Performing A Paper Test
There is another optional test that can be performed using
a flashlight and the help of another person.
One person should be inside the vehicle, and move the
flashlight around the periphery of the door seal, shining
outward. The other person should stand outside of the
vehicle and check for light passing by the seal. If light is
seen through the seal area, the door will need to be
adjusted.
To adjust the seal compression, proceed as follows:
1. Open the door and lift the upper half-door up and
away from the lower half. Lay the upper half-door on
a clean, dry surface.
2. Using an 8 mm open-end wrench (not provided),
loosen the nut located inside the bottom of the upper
half-door post, closest to where the “paper test”
detected a gap.
Nut Location Inside Bottom Of Post
3. Using a 3 mm Allen wrench (not provided), rotate the
screw on the side of the post counterclockwise (while
holding the wrench on the loosened bolt) to increase
the seal compression. If needed, rotate clockwise to
reduce seal compression.
Rotate Screw For Seal Compression
4. Tighten the nut inside the bottom of the post using
the wrench and make sure the screw head is flush to
the post. Reinstall the upper half-door.
1 — 3 mm Allen Wrench
2 — 8 mm Open-End Wrench
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Screw Head Flush To Post
5. Close the door and repeat the “paper test”.
Repeat the adjustment procedure if needed.
6. If needed, add the provided shim to a lower half-door
pocket to seal the upper half-door to the roof:
a. Lift upper half-door up and away from lower half.
b. Clean the bottom of the door pocket.
Remove Upper Half-Door & Clean Bottom Of Door Pocket
c. Slide the shim onto a pencil or similar tool.
d. Remove the paper backing from the adhesive side
of the shim and place the shim with pencil into the
pocket.
e. Press the shim firmly to the bottom of the pocket,
and remove the pencil once the shim is firmly in
place.
Press Shim Firmly Into Bottom Of Pocket
f. Replace upper half-door.
NOTE:
If the compression is increased too much on the front
upper corner of the rear doors, deformation of the seal will
occur.
Half-Door Mirror Installation
To install the front door exterior mirrors on the half-doors,
proceed as follows:
1. Locate the wiring harness on the outside of the front
half-door.
Wiring Harness Location
2. Insert the wiring harness firmly into the connection on
the driver’s side exterior mirror.
1 — Remove Paper Backing From Shim
2 — Slide Pencil through Hole In Shim
3 — Press Pencil With Shim Into Pocket
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Connect Wiring Harness To Exterior Mirror
3. Place the base of the exterior mirror into the hole on
the door, and support it while attaching the three
mirror bolts through the inside of the door using a
#T40 Torx head driver.
Attach Exterior Mirror
NOTE:
Recommended torque for the mirror bolts is
5.9 ft· lb / 8.0 N·m.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 on the opposite side front door.
Half-Door Removal
To remove the half-doors, repeat the installation steps in
reverse order.
NOTE:
When removing the upper half-doors, push upward firmly
on the middle of the upper half-door until the posts detach
from the lower half.
Push Upward On Middle Of Upper Half Door To Remove
1 — Exterior Mirror
2 — Wiring Harness
1 — Support Mirror From Outside
2 — Attach Three Mirror Bolts From Inside
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or
downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Control
To unlock the steering column, push the control downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the control upward until
fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator
turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the center
of the instrument panel below the radio screen, and within
the Climate or Controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 19.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push
downward on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired position.
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seatback Recline
Adjustment
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean
forward or rearward, depending on the direction you would
like the seatback to move. Release the strap when the
desired position is reached and the seatback will lock into
place.
Recline Strap
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Lumbar Support
The Lumbar Support Control knob is located on the
outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control
forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Control Knob
60/40 SPLIT FOLDING REAR SEAT
The 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat can be folded flat to
access the storage area behind the seat. The seat bottom
can also be lifted into the Stadium Position to create more
storage space on the rear floor, and provide access to the
underseat storage bins (if equipped)
Ú page 42.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down
easily.
The center head restraints must be in the lowest posi-
tion to avoid contact with the center console when
folding the seat.
Folding The Rear Seats
To fold down the rear seat, pull the release strap located
on the upper outboard side of the rear seat to release the
seat. The head restraints are folded independently
Ú page 44.
Release Strap Location
Rear Seat Folded Flat
WARNING!
The seatback is not intended to be used for storing
cargo when folded flat, and only folds to allow access to
the cargo area behind the seat. Do not operate the
vehicle with unsecured cargo on the second row folded
seatback.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Each rear seatback can be locked in an upright position
using the vehicle key. Each seatback must be unlocked to
release for folding.
Locking The Seatback
To raise the seatback to the proper position, manually lift
the seatback until it locks into place. To return the head
restraint to the proper position, manually lift up until it
locks into place. If interference from the cargo area behind
the seat prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will
have difficulty returning the seats to their proper position.
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with stow clips located on the
lower trim, next to the rear seats. Use these clips to
hold the seat belt out of the path of the seatback when
it is being folded and raised.
Stow Clip Location
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal. By simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape over time.
REAR SEAT STADIUM POSITION
The rear seat bottoms can be folded upward into the
Stadium Position to create more storage space on the
vehicle’s floor, and to access the under seat storage bins
(if equipped).
To fold the seat bottom upward, proceed as follows:
1. Lift upward on each section of the seat bottom.
Lift From Beneath Seat (Left Side Shown)
2. Raise the seat bottom upward into the Stadium
Position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. Perform a “push - pull - push” check to confirm
the seat is fully locked. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. A red
indicator on the pull strap will be displayed if the
seatback is not securely locked. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Stadium Position
To return the seat bottom to the normal position, push
downward on the raised seat bottom.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen and also in the Climate Control
touchscreen menu.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 19.
REAR SEAT ARMREST — IF EQUIPPED
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear
armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap
under the head restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. The release button does
not need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go,
then push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to
the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but
foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an
adjustable, removable center head restraint.
To fold down the outboard head restraints, push the
button located on the outboard side of the head restraint.
Rear Foldable Outboard Head Restraints
To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up
on the head restraint until it locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head
restraint. To lower the center head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
preceding reinstallation instructions prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust it to the
appropriate height using the adjustment button. For
information on child seat tether routing, see
Ú page 277.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with the
center console when folding the seat down.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C
with 8.4-inch display system.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head
restraints installed while passengers are occupying
the rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area
without the head restraints installed are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
preceding reinstallation instructions prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 404.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Manual Mirror Adjustment
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And Send Or
Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Navigation, And Climate Functions
3 — Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect Controls button on the touchscreen.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The Outside Mirrors are located on the front driver and
passenger side doors, and are adjusted manually or by
power adjustment (if equipped).
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the Outside Mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
For information on the Door Off Mirror Kit (if equipped)
when the front doors are removed, see
Ú page 31.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the door panel
next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Control Switch
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the power mirror control switch, push any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON/RUN position
to adjust the power mirrors.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
S
IGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper outer
corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 56.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®)
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 404.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 49. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the device to
your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission, see the following.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some US gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver.
Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are
in the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause
you and others to be severely injured or killed.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
NOTE:
The universal garage door opener only operates when the
engine is running for security reasons associated with
removable tops and doors.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do
not program the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights
(if equipped), instrument panel lights, instrument panel
light dimming, interior lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel light
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
light position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel light. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a dedicated
position below the headlight assembly. DRLs are active
when the low beams are not on while the vehicle’s
transmission is in any position (automatic transmission), or
when the vehicle begins to move (manual transmission).
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the DRLs will automati-
cally deactivate when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Push Bed Light
4 — Push Front Fog Light
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
3 — Push Bed Light
4 — Push Front Fog Light
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
The High/Low Beam switch is located within the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering wheel.
High beam headlights can be used for improved visibility
in low lit areas when there is no oncoming traffic.
Otherwise, it is recommended to use the low beam
headlights to reduce glare to other vehicles.
With the headlight switch activated, push the
multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch
the headlights to high beams. The lever will return to the
centered position. To return the headlights to low beam,
pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push the lever
toward the instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automatically controlling the high beams through the
use of a camera mounted on the vehicle’s header.
This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can
be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
Ú page 199, as well as turning the headlight switch to
the AUTO position and placing the multifunction lever in
the high beam position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
The Flash-To-Pass feature will illuminate the high beam
headlights temporarily to signal another vehicle of a
passing occurrence. Pull and hold the Multifunction Lever
to activate the Flash-To-Pass feature. When the lever is
released, the Flash-To-Pass feature will deactivate.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic Headlight System will turn the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on.
This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds (programmable through the Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 199) after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime
when the driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The Front Fog Lights are located on the front of the vehicle
below the headlights. When activated, these lights add
illumination directed at the driving surface to aid in poor
visibility conditions.
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the parking lights
or low beam headlights and push the fog light switch.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn the
front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
Front Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
BED LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The bed lights will illuminate the bed and cargo area. Bed
lights are turned on by pushing the bed light switch
located on the lower half of the headlight switch.
Bed Light Switch
Bed Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
A telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster display
when these lights are on. Pushing the switch a second
time will turn the lights off.
The bed lights will turn on for approximately 60 seconds
when a key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The Interior Courtesy Lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the instrument panel
dimmer control (dial on the right) on the headlight switch
fully upward while the doors are closed, or if equipped,
when the unlock button is pushed on the key fob.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
The Interior Courtesy Lights are located in the center of the
vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one large center light
and four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
Interior Courtesy Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating
the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme
bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off.
This allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
DIMMER CONTROL
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Rotating the dimmer control will
also adjust the interior and ambient light levels
(e.g. courtesy lights in the footwell, illuminated
cupholders, and front door handles).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column; it operates the
multiple wiper options. The front wipers are operated by
rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Windshield Wiper/Washer Operation
1 — Pull For Windshield Washer
2 — Rotate For Wiper Operation
3 — Push Up For Mist
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make
a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first
detent position for one of four intermittent settings. The
delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold until
desired spray is reached. If the lever is pulled while in the
delay range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for
two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then,
the intermittent interval previously selected will resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will
operate for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers will
turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released the washer will resume normal operation.
Mist
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off-road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long
as the lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 350.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and
the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
(Continued)
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. MAX A/C sets the
control for maximum cooling performance.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience for
warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the current setting. The
AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on.
This feature automatically controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution and blower speed.
Air conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO
operation to improve performance. AUTO Mode is highly
recommended for efficiency. Toggling this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic mode
Ú page 60.
Front Defrost
Turn the Mode control knob to Front Defrost to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button,
the Climate Control system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control
button on the touchscreen, or push and release
the button on the faceplate to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the
red arrow button on the touchscreen
for warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen
for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on.
SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob or press one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
CAUTION!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the button on
the blower knob to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to the
MAX A/C setting to change the current setting
to the coldest output of air. Moving the
temperature control knob away from the
MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button on the faceplate
to change the system between recirculation
mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator (if equipped)
illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such
as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The
A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is
not recommended. On systems with Manual Climate
Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
is disabled automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode causes
the LED on the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost
Turn the Mode control knob to Front Defrost to
change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button,
the Climate Control system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air
forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn the
temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn the
temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise increases
the heating temperature and turning the temperature
control knob counterclockwise decreases the heating
temperature.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are
seven blower speeds available. The blower
speeds increase as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob or press one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-program-
mable feature within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 199.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 384.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower storage
compartment. To open the upper storage compartment,
lift the top latch. To access the lower storage
compartment, lift the bottom latch.
Center Console
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute
to flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
on (A/C) to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the control
to (Mix Mode).
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with the glove compartment
in the open position. Driving with the glove
compartment open may result in injury in a collision.
1 — Upper Console Storage Latch
2 — Lower Console Storage Latch
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Under Seat Storage — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two options for under
seat storage:
Non-Locking Storage Wall
Under Seat Locking Storage Bin
Non-Locking Storage Wall
Non-Locking Storage Wall
The Non-Locking Storage Wall can be used for storage by
folding the bottom of the rear seat up and placing items
behind the wall.
There is also an option to remove the wall by removing the
four bolts that connect the storage wall to the floor.
Locking Storage Bin
Locking Storage Bin (Closed View)
If equipped, the Locking Storage Bin is located below the
rear seats. It can be accessed by folding the rear seat
bottom upward into the Stadium Position.
The Locking Storage Bin has two keyed locks on the
front of the bin and uses the same key as the glove
compartment and the center console for your vehicle.
Inside the bin are three removable dividers to set up
storage that works best for you.
The Locking Storage Bin can be removed by unfastening
the four bolts that attach the bin to the vehicle floor
using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet. The
bottom of the storage bin has rubber mats that need to be
removed to access the four bolts. These bolts can then be
stored in the fastener bin below the rear seat.
Under Seat Storage (Open View)
Your Locking Storage Bin also has a front handle that
makes it easier to carry and pull out from the floor of the
vehicle when the four bolts that attach the bin to the floor
are removed.
1 — Key Locks
2 — Removable Bolts
3 — Handle
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Behind Seat Storage — If Equipped
The rear wall storage bin is located behind the right rear
seat.
Rear Wall Storage Bin
Rear Wall Storage Bin
To access the storage bin, pull upward on the pull strap
located on the upper outboard side of the right rear seat,
and fold the seatback forward.
NOTE:
The rear seatback can be locked using the vehicle key to
secure items in the rear wall storage bin. The seat lock is
located on the upper outboard side of each seatback.
Both seatbacks should be locked to limit access to items
behind seat.
Rear Wall Netting
The rear wall netting can be accessed the same way as the
rear wall storage bin.
Rear Wall Netting
Fastener Bin
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fastener Bin used to
store the fasteners for the doors, windshield, and hard top
(if equipped) while not in use. The Fastener Bin is located
behind the rear seat storage bin. The Fastener Bin
contains foam inserts for each of the fasteners; they are
removable.
To remove the Fastener Bin:
1. Remove the lid and foam inserts from the
Fastener Bin.
2. Remove the three nuts from the bottom of the
Fastener Bin.
NOTE:
The soft top fasteners do not go in the Fastener Bin.
Fastener Bin
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the front
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Controls
Ú page 55.
1 — Rear Wall Storage Bin
2 — Pull Strap
1 — Door Removal
2 — Under Seat Storage Bin Removal
3 — Folding Windshield
4 — Hard Top Removal
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
AUX/USB CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel, below
the climate controls. Behind the media hub access door,
the Media Hub contains one AUX port, a Type C USB port
and one standard USB port. Both USB ports allow you to
play music from smartphones or USB devices through the
vehicle’s sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
Ú page 238.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your
device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned off.
NOTE:
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will begin
charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C
and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the
same time but cannot be used simultaneously while
playing media. When both Type C and Type A
charge-only USB ports are in use they will be charged at
a reduced rate.
Both ports share a single data connection. The user
cannot switch between Type A and Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a
message will appear and allow you to select which device
to use.
Media Hub
Located inside the center console, a second USB port
allows you to only charge USB devices.
Depending on your vehicle’s specifications, the USB port
may contain playback capabilities and will allow you to
play music from your smartphone device or USB devices
through your vehicle’s sound system.
A third and fourth USB port are located behind the
center console, above the power inverter. Both ports are
charge only.
USB (Charge Only) On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged into the USB
ports, one of the following message will display depending
on the device being utilized:
“A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device”.
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
JEEP® WIRELESS SPEAKER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a wireless Bluetooth®
speaker.
Getting To Know Your Speaker
Speaker Buttons
Rear Speaker Outlets
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device while
driving. Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision.
1 — Power ON/OFF
2 — Bluetooth®/App Pairing
3 — Play/Pause
4 — Volume Down/Skip Back
5 — Voice Control/Call Control
6 — Volume Up/Skip Forward
1 — Reset Button
2 — Battery Status Button
3 — Service/Diagnostic Port
(Non-charging, Non-customer use port)
4 — Type A USB Charging Port
5 — Battery Status LED
6 — Speaker Charging Port
7 — AUX Port
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Jeep® Wireless Speaker Location
Wireless Speaker Location
The Jeep® wireless speaker is located behind the right
rear passenger seat. In order to access the Jeep® wireless
speaker, the seat will need to be folded down or tilted
forward.
To remove the Jeep® wireless speaker, pull on the strap
located on top of the mount for the speaker. When the
strap is pulled, the Jeep® wireless speaker can easily be
lifted from the mount.
When placing the Jeep® wireless speaker back in the
mount, simply put the speaker back in the mount.
Placement of the Wireless Speaker
Then push/rotate forward on the front of the speaker until
the speaker locks in place.
Rotating the Wireless Speaker
Charging External Devices
The Jeep® wireless speaker is capable of charging
most USB-enabled smartphones and tablets using the
type A USB charging port.
To use the external charging feature:
1. Turn the speaker on.
2. Plug the USB power cable into the type A USB
charging port on the back of the speaker.
3. Insert the other end of the USB power cable into your
device to immediately begin charging.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Charging The Speaker
Before using the Jeep® wireless speaker for the first time,
fully charge your Jeep® wireless speaker until the battery
indicator light stays solid green.
The Jeep® wireless speaker in-vehicle dock is the most
ideal way to fully charge the speaker with the ignition in
ON/RUN or ACC. The speaker can also be charged with a
power adapter.
NOTE:
Jeep® wireless speaker will not charge within vehicle dock
while the ignition is fully off.
To charge the Jeep® wireless speaker with a power
adapter, insert the power adapter into a wall outlet. Next,
plug the power adapter into the Jeep® wireless speaker
charging port on the back of the speaker.
NOTE:
Power adapter needed for the Jeep® wireless speaker has
to have a range of 14 VDC to 16.5 VDC, with a minimum
of 2.7A and a barrel connector dimension of 5.5 mm by
2.5 mm. Power adapter is not included.
Operating Temperature
The Jeep® wireless speaker contains a lithium-ion rechargeable battery. Typical charging temperatures for these types of batteries are from 0 to 45°C (32 to 113°F).
NOTE:
The functions described are for when the Jeep® wireless speaker is undocked from the vehicle. When plugged into the docking station, the Jeep® wireless speaker functions as
part of the vehicle’s sound system.
Monitoring Battery Level Status LED Light
Red 40% or lower
Yellow 40% to 70%
Green 70% to 100%
Temperature
<-4°F
(< -20°C)
-4 to 32°F
(< -20 to 0°C)
32 to 113°F
(0 to 45°C)
115 to 140°F
(46 to 60°C)
>140°F
(>60°C)
Speaker state (docked or
Direct Current [DC] plugged in)
Off On On On Off
Speaker state (undocked and running off battery) Off On On On Off
Speaker’s Internal Battery Charging No No Yes No No
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Phone & Bluetooth® Pairing
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is the ability for
the Jeep® wireless speaker to connect to devices using
Bluetooth®. Follow these simple steps to connect a
Bluetooth®-enabled device to the Jeep® wireless
speaker:
1. Press and hold the power button for 2-3 seconds to
turn the Jeep® wireless speaker on.
2. Turn “on” Bluetooth® for the device you desire to be
connected to the Jeep® wireless speaker. For
instructions on how to turn on and off Bluetooth®
settings for the desired device, refer to the device’s
user manual.
3. When powered on, the Jeep® wireless speaker will
automatically enter pairing mode. To pair a second
device, press and hold the Bluetooth® button for
2-3 seconds, until an audio cue is heard. Then go
to the devices’ Bluetooth® settings and select
“Jeep® Speaker” from the list.
The Jeep® wireless speaker will remember the last
eight devices it has paired with.
NOTE:
If the Jeep® wireless speaker is left on with an inactive
Bluetooth® connection for 30 minutes, it will automati-
cally turn off. The Jeep® wireless speaker can be turned
on again by pressing and holding the power button for
2-3 seconds.
Resetting Your Jeep® Wireless Speaker
To reset the Jeep® wireless speaker to its original factory
setting, press and hold the reset button under the back
cover for 8-10 seconds.
Speakerphone
The speakerphone feature can be used by pressing the
“Voice Control” button on the Jeep® wireless speaker.
This feature can be used to answer and end calls over the
speakerphone.
Volume And Playback Control
Volume can be increased or decreased by briefly pressing
the + button or - button. When the maximum volume is
reached, an audio cue will sound.
To skip to the next track, press and hold the + button.
To go to the previous track, press the - button.
Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo
A feature of the Jeep® wireless speaker is being able to
pair two Jeep® wireless speakers together for Qualcomm
TrueWireless™ Stereo. This feature allows for two Jeep®
wireless speakers to play left and right stereo sound.
Below are the steps needed for Qualcomm TrueWireless™
Stereo:
1. Push and hold the power button on both
Jeep® wireless speakers until both speakers
turn on.
2. Place both speakers into Qualcomm TrueWireless™
Stereo pairing mode. This can be achieved by
pressing and holding the Battery Status button on
both speakers until an audio notification is heard
from both speakers.
3. Connect one of the Jeep® wireless speakers to the
Bluetooth® source. Refer to previous section “Phone
& Bluetooth® Pairing” for additional information.
4. Once the Jeep® wireless speaker is connected to the
Bluetooth® device, audio will be played from both
speakers.
NOTE:
While in Qualcomm TrueWireless™ Stereo mode, the
volume will not have independent speaker control.
Pushing the Up or Down Volume button on either Jeep®
wireless speaker will affect the audio output on both, as
well as volume adjustments on the Bluetooth® device.
Waterproof Features
The Jeep® wireless speaker is IP67 waterproof certified
with design in mind to withstand rainfall, waterjets,
splashing and being submerged in up to 3 ft (1 m) of
water for up to 30 minutes.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Warnings, Caution & Legal Information
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose
the Jeep® wireless speaker to rain or moisture while
charging. The Jeep® wireless speaker should not be
exposed to dripping or splashing, and objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, should not be placed on or near it
while being charged or charging other devices. As with any
electronic products, use care not to spill liquids into any
part of the product. Liquids can cause a failure and/or a
fire hazard. The power supply must be used indoors only.
Make no modifications to the product or accessories.
Unauthorized alterations may compromise safety,
regulatory compliance, and system performance, and will
void the warranty. Do not place any flame sources, such as
lighted candles, on or near the Jeep® wireless speaker.
The Jeep® wireless speaker contains small parts that may
be a choking hazard and is not suitable for children under
age 3. Do not continue charging the battery if it does not
reach full charge within the specified charging time.
Overcharging may cause the battery to become hot,
rupture, or ignite. If you see any heat deformation or
leakage, properly dispose of the battery. Do not attempt to
charge the battery in temperatures outside the range of
32°- 104°F (0° - 40°C). If the battery begins to leak, do
not allow the liquid to come in contact with your skin or
eyes. If contact has been made, wash the affected area
with plenty of water and seek medical attention
immediately. Do not expose the Jeep® wireless speaker or
battery to excessive heat, including direct sunlight or fire.
Do not store or use inside cars in hot weather, where it can
be exposed to temperatures in excess of 115°F (60°C).
Doing so may cause the battery and power supply to
generate heat, rupture, or ignite. Using the Jeep® wireless
speaker in this manner also may result in a loss of
performance and a shortened life expectancy. Extended
exposure to direct sunlight may damage the external
appearance and material qualities. Do not step on, throw,
or drop batteries or the power supply or device, or expose
them to a strong shock. Do not pierce, crush, dent, or
deform the batteries or power supply in any way. If either
becomes deformed, properly dispose of it. Do not
short-circuit batteries. Do not attempt to service
the Jeep® wireless speaker yourself. Opening or
removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or
other hazards and will void the manufacturer’s warranty.
To prevent risk of fire or electric shock, avoid overloading
wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience
receptacles. Your Bluetooth® device (mobile phone,
music player, tablet, laptop, etc.) must support the
A2DP Bluetooth® profile in order to work wirelessly with
your Jeep® wireless speaker. The A2DP profile is
supported by most recent mobile products with built-in
Bluetooth® capability. Please refer to your device’s
user manual for details and instruction regarding the
Bluetooth® profiles it supports. This device complies with
part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Jeep® follows Safety Instruction for CE- LV. Do not operate
products in temperatures outside the range of -5 to 40°C.
Operating Frequency Band: 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz.
Maximum RF power: 6 dBm EIRP. Do not install this
equipment in a confined space or building, such as a
bookcase or similar unit that is not well-ventilated.
The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the
ventilation openings with items such as newspaper,
tablecloths, curtains etc.
NOTE:
Please refer to the information on the bottom of the Jeep®
wireless speaker for electrical and safety information
before installing or operating the Jeep® wireless speaker.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
type. If the battery or battery pack is exposed to
excessive heat or fire, personal injury may occur.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended to
prevent theft and/or damage.
Always remember to cycle the ignition to OFF to
prevent battery drainage.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
(Continued)
Directive 2014/53/EU Article 10 Obligations of
Manufacturers
2. Manufacturers shall ensure that radio equipment shall
be so constructed that it can be operated in at least one
Member State without infringing applicable requirements
on the use of radio spectrum.
10. In cases of restrictions on putting in to service or of
requirements for authorization of use, information
available on the packaging shall allow the identification of
the Member States or the geographical area within a
Member State where restrictions on putting into service or
requirements for authorization of use exist. The
Commission may adopt implementing acts specifying how
to present that information. Those implementing acts
shall be adopted in accordance with the advisory
procedure referred to in Article 45 (2).
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by FCA US LLC is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
POWER OUTLETS
There is a 12 Volt (13 A) auxiliary power outlet that can
provide power for accessories designed for use with the
standard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of the
instrument panel below the climate controls, and is
powered from the ignition switch. Power is available when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13 A)
at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 A) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to
be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTERS — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 V (400 W) maximum inverter outlet located
on the back of the center console to convert Direct Current
(DC) to Alternating Current (AC).
This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
Power Inverter
There may also be a second 115 V (400 W) maximum
exterior power inverter located on the rear right side of the
truck bed near the tailgate. This inverter can be turned on
by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch located to
the left of the steering wheel. This inverter can power
cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 W. Certain video game consoles
exceed this limit, as will most power tools. The indicator
light on the power inverter switch will be illuminated when
the inverter is turned on.
Power Inverter Switch (If Equipped)
Exterior Truck Bed Power Inverter (If Equipped)
NOTE:
400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet.
If two outlets are in use, 400 W is shared among the
devices plugged in.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 400 W is exceeded, the
power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset.
NOTE:
The Power Inverter will only turn on if the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
will turn off if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches are located in the lower switch
bank of the instrument panel and can be used to power
various electrical devices.
The functionality of the auxiliary switches can be changed
via the Uconnect Settings. All switches can be configured
for setting the switch type operation to latching or
momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and
ability to hold last state across key cycles.
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is
set to latching and power source is set to ignition within
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 199.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power four
blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment and
under the hood to the right, near the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections — Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, on the passenger side under the instrument
panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with
the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/installation
of your electrical devices.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wire Color Chart
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power windows feature allows for movement of the
windows with the push of a button. The power window
switches are located on the instrument panel below the
climate controls. Push the switch downward to open the
window and pull upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window and the
top right switch controls the right front window. The
bottom left switch controls the left rear window and the
bottom right switch controls the right rear window.
Power Window Switches
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not leave
the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
There are window switches located on the rear of the
center console for the rear passenger windows.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power window switch and the front
passenger door power window switch have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch down, past the detent,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly, without going past the detent, and release it
when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
To open the rear sliding window, push the release button
inward while sliding the window into the open position.
Release Button Location
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable
the window controls, rotate the switch downward. To
enable the window controls, rotate the switch upward.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
GLADIATOR TOPS
PROVIDED TOOLS
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your
vehicle located in the center console. This kit includes the
necessary tools required for the operations described in
the following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for
easy use.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used inde-
pendently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops being installed at the same time.
Provided Tools
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top
system will be provided in a separate box located in the
bed of the vehicle for shipping purposes only.
1 — Ratchet
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
LOWERING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult
to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the
vinyl or acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the
top can then be installed.
If the temperature is 41°F (5°C)
or below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the
rear or side curtains.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
up/removed unless the quarter windows are also
removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the elements.
Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the
vehicle or to protect against injury during an acci-
dent. Remember, always wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch
points when installing and removing the soft top.
The lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause
serious injury if fingers or hands get caught in
between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting
or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was
not designed as a structural member of the vehicle
and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads
other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature is below
41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
Follow the proper steps for cleaning and caring for
your vehicle’s fabric top
Ú page 386.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top frame-
work when opening or closing. Damage to the top
may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew on the top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION!
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Side View Top And Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — Quarter Panel Upper Hook And Loop
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Quarter Panel Vertical Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Rear Window Vertical Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
5 — #5 Bow
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Rear Window View And Components
1 — Top Retainer 4 — Pull Tabs
2 — Left Vertical Retainer 5 — Lower Center Retainer
3 — Lower Retainers 6 — Right Vertical Retainer
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top Into The Sunrider® Position:
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fold both sun visors forward
against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from
the crossbar by pulling the handle
downward. Make sure the hook is
fully disengaged from its receiver.
Step Two
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1
Bow of the soft top to begin the operation. It is
recommended to utilize two people for this
procedure.
Step Three
4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link
to fold the soft top rearward.
Step Four
5. Secure the top in this position by using the two
hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the center
console.
Step Five
NOTE:
The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® Position with
the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies fully
installed or completely removed.
CAUTION!
Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear window must
be either all in or all out.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Removing The Rear Window And Quarter
Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE:
Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear window
must
ALL be removed together, or installed together.
1. Start by removing the rear window first. Use the two
straps located on the bottom of each side of the rear
window to remove the right and left vertical
retainers, as well as the lower center retainer.
Step One (Right Side Shown)
Step One
2. While keeping the rear window level, slide it outward
in either direction until it is completely separate from
its retainer.
Do not pull downward while removing the
rear window. Damage to the retainer could result.
Store the rear window in the soft top rear window
storage bag (if equipped), or in a safe location
Ú page 82.
Step Two
3. After removing the rear window, remove the quarter
panel cover assemblies starting with either side.
Disengage the quarter panel cover assembly from the
bottom by pulling the fabric at the bottom upward.
4. With two hands, grab the front of the quarter panel
cover assembly and pull outward to disengage it from
its retainer on the door frame.
Step Four
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull the quarter panel cover assembly up and out
from the bottom, then pull it down and away from the
vehicle to remove.
Step Five
6. Repeat this procedure for the other quarter panel
cover assembly. Store the assemblies in the soft top
rear window storage bag (if equipped), or a safe
location.
Soft Top Rear Window Storage Bag —
If Equipped
To safely store the soft top rear window, proceed as
follows:
1. With the bag opened completely, fold the fabric
divider downward and lay the rear window in the
bottom of the bag.
Step One
2. Fold the divider upward, covering the rear window.
Step Two
3. Lay the first quarter panel cover assembly all the way
to the right side and the second quarter panel cover
assembly on the left side. Secure both using the two
hook-and-loop fastener straps on each side.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
NOTE:
The quarter panel cover assemblies are marked “1” and
“2” on the inside of the panel assembly.
Step Three
4. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.
Step Four
RAISING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. From the Sunrider® Position,
remove straps if previously
secured.
Step One
2. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward
the front of the vehicle, manually guiding the top into
the closed position.
Step Two
Step Two
1 — Left Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
2 — Right Quarter Panel Cover Assembly
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the soft top or vehicle.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header
latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.
Step Three
4. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place.
Step Four
5. Repeat steps three and four on the other side.
Installing The Rear Window And Quarter
Panel Cover Assemblies
NOTE:
Both quarter panel cover assemblies and the rear window
must
ALL be removed together, or installed together.
If the rear window and quarter panel cover assemblies
were previously removed, proceed as follows to install:
1. Guide the top of the quarter panel cover assembly
up into the retainer.
Step One
2. Engage the plastic retainers on the front of the cover
assembly (toward the front of the vehicle) starting at
the top, and working downward.
Step Two
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged before the
vehicle resumes motion.
3. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper front
corner of each quarter panel cover assembly by
pressing firmly.
Step Three
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all quarter panel cover assembly and
rear window install steps could result in damage to the
Soft Top or vehicle.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
4. From either side, guide the rear window into the
retainer while keeping the window level.
Step Four
5. Engage the retainer along the bottom of the rear
window beginning on the left side of the vehicle and
working toward the center. Then, move to the right
side of the vehicle and continue from the center,
working to the right until the rear window is secured
in the lower retainer.
Step Five
6. Engage the vertical retainers up the right and left side
of the rear window.
Step Six
7. Tuck the rear window under the soft top fabric and
press firmly.
Step Seven
8. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right
and left corners.
CAUTION!
Quarter panel cover assemblies and rear window must
be either all in or all out.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOVING THE SOFT TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Fully lower the soft top to the
Sunrider® position
Ú
page 77.
2. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head fasteners on the
inside of each top mechanism.
Step Two
3. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and away from
the vehicle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s sport bar
and trim. Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry
location.
4. Remove the door frames. The rear door frames must
be removed before the front door frames
Ú page 96.
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the six Torx head fasteners on both
rear corners and the back of the cab, then remove the
belt rail.
NOTE:
Folding down the rear seats is recommended to provide
easier access to the fasteners.
Step Five
INSTALLING THE SOFT TOP
NOTE:
If installing the soft top immediately after removing the
hard top, ensure the wire harness is stored properly, and
not tucked under the belt rail
Ú page 91.
1. Install the belt rail on the rear of the vehicle. Secure
the belt rail using the six fasteners with the provided
#T50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to the
following table for recommended torque specifi-
cations.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the soft top or vehicle.
1 — Corner Fasteners
2 — Rear Fasteners
Torque
Specification For
Torx Fastener
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb
(13.5 N·m)
150.5 in-lb
(17.0 N·m)
106.2 in-lb
(12.0 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Step One
2. Install the door frames. Start with both front doors,
followed by both rear doors. Apply the appropriate
torque specifications for the door frame Torx head
fasteners
Ú page 96.
3. Unsnap and remove the storage bag. This bag should
be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover
for shipping only.
4. Ensure the top is secured with the provided
hook-and-loop fasteners, then lift the soft top onto
the rear of the cab. Line up the locater pins (one on
each side of the soft top) with the rear door frames.
Step Four
5. Using the provided #T50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, install and tighten the Torx fasteners by
turning them clockwise. Secure them until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for
recommended torque specifications. Repeat on the
opposite side.
Step Five
1 — Corner Fasteners
2 — Rear Fasteners
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage
to the soft top or vehicle.
Torque
Specification For
Torx Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lb
(13.5 N·m)
150.5 in-lb
(17.0 N·m)
106.2 in-lb
(12.0 N·m)
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Step Five
6. Before driving the vehicle with the top in the
Sunrider® position, ensure the top is secured with
the provided hook-and-loop fasteners
Ú page 83.
Step Six
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S) REMOVAL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the
fasteners if they are overtightened.
CAUTION!
The hard top is not designed to carry any additional
loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires,
building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc.
Ú page 107.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the front header, sport bar,
and body, or fully removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to panel removal. Removing the top, opening a door,
or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Hard Top Components
1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The left side panel must be removed before removing the
right side panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side panel
(one at the front, the rear, and outside), unlocking
them from the roof.
Step Two
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at the
top of the windshield.
Step Three
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the preceding steps to remove the right side
panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag —
If Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to store
your hard top panels. The storage bag contains two
compartments.
Lay the bag for the panels down so the loops and hooks
are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting
the panel into the panels bag.
There is a pouch located on the front of the bag to store
the provided hard top edge protectors that are used
when the hard top is not installed on the vehicle.
1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag with
the latches facing upward.
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
lying flat).
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag
with the latches facing downward.
NOTE:
Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to inserting the
panel into the bag.
1 — Outside Panel Lock
2 — Rear Panel Lock
3 — Front Panel Lock
1 — Header Panel Latched
2 — Header Panel Unlatched
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag closed.
Step Four
5. Store the Freedom Top panels bag in a safe location.
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL(S)
I
NSTALLATION
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame with
the locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole,
followed by the left side panel, making sure there is
no overhang. Make sure that the panels are sitting
flush with the body.
2. Secure the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top panels
should be clear of any dust and debris prior to
reinstallation.
REMOVING THE HARD TOP
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Remove both front panels
Ú
page 88.
2. Open both front doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head
driver and ratchet, remove the
two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at
the B-pillar (near the top of the front doors).
Step Three
4. If equipped, remove the lower interior soft trim panel
(attached by the hook-and-loop fastener) by pulling
the panel away from the trim.
Step Four
5. Remove the Torx head fasteners that secure the hard
top to the vehicle: two along the interior body side,
rearward of the back doors, followed by the four
fasteners along the back of the vehicle cab using the
#T50 Torx head driver.
Step Five
1 — Vehicle Cab Torx Head Fasteners
2 — Body side Torx Head Fasteners
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner
of the vehicle. To access the harness, remove the
plastic cover by pushing the cover to the side, and
sliding it off.
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
Step Six
7. To release the wire harness, pull back on the
red latch (1), then push down on the black button (2)
while pulling the harness out.
Step Seven
8. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Install the
provided edge protectors along the bottom edges of
the hard top, and place the hard top on a soft surface
to prevent damage.
9. Store the wire harness by removing the storage cover
on the quarter trim. Use the mechanical key blade to
pry the cover open.
Step Nine
10. Tuck the wire harness inside the storage
compartment, and replace the cover.
Step Ten
1 — Red Latch
2 — Black Button
CAUTION!
The removal of the Hard Top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the Hard Top.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
INSTALLING THE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they
must be removed prior to installation of the hard top
Ú page 96.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the vehicle
while making sure that the top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and across the back. Then follow the removal
steps in reverse order.
NOTE:
Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in
reverse order.
When reinstalling the interior soft trim panel:
Be sure the panel is centered so that there is an
even gap on both sides.
Apply pressure over the hook-and-loop fasteners
to ensure they are properly secured.
The Torx head fasteners that attach the hard top to
the body should be torqued to 155 in-lb +/- 22 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m) using the provided #T50 Torx head
driver and ratchet.
SUNRIDER® FOR HARD TOP —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Sunrider® soft top can be used in place of the Hard
Top Freedom Panels for quick and easy opening of the
area above the driver and front passenger seats.
Sunrider® For Hard Top
CAUTION!
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The hard top is not designed to carry any additional
loads, such as after-market roof racks, spare tires,
building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc.
Ú page 107.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
body, or fully removed.
The removal of the hard top requires four adults
located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution
could damage the hard top.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. Damage to the
retainers will occur.
WARNING!
Do not open or close the Sunrider® top while driving.
Operating the top while driving could cause the driver to
lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning
may result in serious injury or death.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To install the Sunrider® soft top, proceed as follows:
1. Remove both front Hard Top Freedom panels
Ú
page 88.
2. With the help of a second person, set the Sunrider®
top onto the top of the vehicle making sure to align
the holes at the front and rear of the side rails.
Lower Sunrider® Onto The Vehicle
3. Swing the front frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and insert the door rail attachment bolt (provided
bolt without spacer) from underneath. Tighten with a
#40 Torx head driver until snug.
Attach Front Door Rail Bolt
4. Insert the rear door rail attachment bolt (provided
bolt with spacer) from underneath. Tighten with
#40 Torx head driver until snug.
Attach Rear Door Rail Bolt
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 on the other side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the front and
rear door rail attachment bolts is 8.8 ft-lb (12 N·m).
6. Attach the rear clamp at the rear center of the
Sunrider® top using the two provided rear clamp
attachment bolts. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver
until snug.
Rear Clamp Location
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the rear clamp
attachment bolts is 3.7 ft-lb (5 N·m).
7. From inside the vehicle, lift and pull the Sunrider®
top forward using the integrated handle on the front
header of the top. Manually guide the top into the
closed position.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Push Sunrider® Top Forward
8. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header
latch downward to engage the hook into its receiver.
Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the
hook, locking the latch into place. Repeat on the
other side.
Engage Both Header Latches
To Open The Sunrider® Top
To open the Sunrider® top, proceed as follows:
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar by
pulling the handle downward. Make sure the hook is
disengaged from its receiver.
Release Both Header Latches
3. From the front of the Sunrider® top, lift and push the
top rearward to the Sunrider® position.
Sunrider® Position
4. Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided with the Sunrider® kit, and wrap
one around the side rails on each side of the
Sunrider® top to hold it in place.
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Placement
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR FRAME — IF EQUIPPED WITH A
SOFT TOP
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL
NOTE:
The rear door frames must be removed first, followed by
the front door frames.
1. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, loosen the Torx head fasteners located on
the underside of each door hinge (two per door), and
remove the fasteners by pulling downward.
Step One
NOTE:
The fasteners will not fall out once completely loose, as
they are held in place by design.
Step One
2. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.
Step Two
3. Store the fasteners in a secure location.
4. Repeat the procedure on the front door frame.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door
frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is
wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION
1. Install the front door frame first.
2. Ensure the windshield is in the “up” position.
Carefully place the front door frame in the rubber seal
at the top of the windshield, and line up the holes for
the Torx head fasteners (two for each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the door
frame, and insert the fasteners from underneath.
Tighten with the #T40 Torx head driver until they are
snug, being careful not to cross-thread the fasteners
or overtighten. Refer to the following table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door frame
fasteners.
Tighten Fasteners
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the
body side, just behind the rear door opening.
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the
rear belt rail and the rear of the front door frame,
making sure the rubber seals lie flat. Ensure the seals
are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
Step Five
Step Five
6. Insert the fasteners from underneath. Tighten with
the #T40 Torx head driver until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or
overtighten. Refer to the previous table for the
appropriate torque specifications for the door frame
fasteners.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door
and/or door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation only.
Target Torque
Specification For
Torx Fasteners
Maximum Minimum
44.2 in-lb
(5 N·m)
53.1 in-lb
(6 N·m)
35.4 in-lb
(4 N·m)
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten Torx fasteners. You can strip the
fasteners if they are overtightened.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural
element that can provide protection in some accidents.
The windshield also provides protection against weather,
road debris and intrusion of small branches and other
objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down, as you lose the protection this structural element
provides.
If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be
folded down. However, the protection afforded by the
windshield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
with the windshield folded down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required its
removal is completed and before you return to on-road
driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat
belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of
whether the windshield is raised or folded down.
LOWERING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Before completing the following steps:
If your vehicle is equipped with a soft top, the top
MUST be lowered
Ú page 77, and the door
frames must be removed
Ú page 96 prior to
lowering the windshield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a hard top, the
Freedom Panels
MUST be removed prior to
lowering the windshield
Ú page 88.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over the
windshield wiper hex bolts.
Step Two
3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the two
hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun
visors.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against
personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all
times when the windshield is down.
Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for
raising the windshield. Make sure that the folding
windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all
associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and
tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle
from providing you and your passengers’ protection
in some accidents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door may
cause personal injury.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the
vehicle’s header seal.
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
5. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, remove
the four Torx head fasteners located along the
interior of the windshield (two on each side of the
header trim).
Step Five
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded
holes and tighten for safekeeping, or in the fastener bin
located below the rear seat.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
tie-down bumpers (if equipped).
Step Six
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down bumper on either side of the
hood and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap
to secure the windshield in place.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor Protective
Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective cover that
is to be used whenever the windshield is folded down in
order to protect the ACC/FCW sensor. To install the cover,
refer to the following instructions:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to
the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it covers
the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.
Protective Cover Installed
1 — Outer Torx Fasteners
2 — Center Torx Fasteners
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Tie-Down
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could result.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning the wind-
shield to the normal position. Store the cover in the cargo
area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
accumulate in the cover and block the camera lens. Use a
microfiber cloth to clean the camera lens, module, and
inside cover, being careful not to damage or scratch the
module.
RAISING THE WINDSHIELD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the
lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #T40 Torx head driver, reinstall
the four Torx head fasteners located along the
interior of the windshield (two on each side of the
header trim). Secure them until they are snug, being
careful not to cross-thread the fasteners or
overtighten.
Step Three
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the
provided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of the
blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then, while holding
the arm in that position, reinstall the hex nut and
tighten until snug. Be careful not to overtighten.
Repeat for the other arm.
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper arm hex
bolts and push gently until they snap into place.
Step Five
NOTE:
Make sure the windshield is raised prior to installing
the tops.
1 — Outer Torx Fasteners
2 — Center Torx Fasteners
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Release both of the outside hood latches.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood slightly, and place a hand palm-side down
in the center of the hood opening. Locate the safety latch
in the middle, and push the latch to the right to open.
Place Hand In Hood Opening
Remove the support rod from the hood, and insert it into
the radiator crossmember.
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
You may have to push down slightly on the hood before
pushing the safety latch.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the
radiator crossmember, and install into the clip on the
hood. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood
latches.
TAILGATE
OPENING
Tailgate Release Handle
To open the tailgate, pull the release handle located on
the center of the tailgate and guide it to the lowered
position.
The tailgate is dampened to provide a slower, more
controlled lowering.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
THREE-POSITION TAILGATE
The vehicle’s tailgate can be set to three positions: open,
mid, or closed. The mid position can be used to provide a
loading surface for transporting sheet goods.
To use the mid position, open the tailgate and lower it to
near mid position.
Tailgate In Mid Position
Secure the tailgate in this position by looping the tailgate
straps behind the circular retainer on both sides.
Loop Tailgate Strap Behind Circular Retainer
Ensure the tailgate strap is properly seated behind the
circular retainer against the sides of the sheet metal.
Correctly Seated Tailgate Strap
Incorrectly Seated Tailgate Strap
When hauling cargo using the mid position and the
tailgate, you
must support the load at two forward
locations:
At the top of the rear wheelhouse (1)
Between the wheelhouse and the tailgate (2)
Chamfered Boards In Pickup Box
1 — Support Location 1
2 — Support Location 2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
NOTE:
Failure to support the load at these two forward locations
could result in damage.
Three 2x4 boards are needed to provide support at
locations (1) and (2). Each board will need to be cut to
fit inside the pickup box.
The support at location (1) should be seated in the
dedicated formation on top of the wheelhouses.
The support at location (2) should use the remaining
two 2x4s. Stack the boards and place them into the
formation in the side wall of the pickup box. The
corners of the bottom board will need to be chamfered
to fit.
NOTE:
All cargo transported in the pickup box
must be
secured.
The maximum payload for the mid position is
300 lb (136 kg).
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, lift upward until both sides latch
into place.
NOTE:
If the Tonneau Cover is installed, make sure the
Tonneau Cover is fully closed before closing the
tailgate.
Due to the presence of the Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp, removal of the tailgate is not recommended.
BED RAIL TIE DOWN SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Bed Rail Tie Down system allows you to properly
secure cargo in the truck bed.
Bed Rail Tie Down Locations
There are two adjustable utility rail cleats on each side of
the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Each utility rail cleat must be tightened down in one of the
detents along either utility rail in order to keep cargo
properly secured.
To move the utility rail cleat to any position on the utility
rail, turn the cleat retainer nut counterclockwise several
times. Then, pull out on the utility rail cleat and slide it to
the detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the
utility rail cleat is seated in the detent, and tighten the nut.
CAUTION!
After closing, pull back on the tailgate firmly to ensure it
is securely latched. Failure to securely latch the tailgate
could result in damage to the vehicle or cargo.
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lb (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat
should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the utility rail cleats from the side utility rails,
slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located at the end
of the rail toward the front of the vehicle.
To remove the utility rail cleat from the front utility rail,
slide the cleat to the rectangular cutout located on the left
side of the rail.
TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tonneau Cover can be installed on the truck bed to
keep cargo out of view, and protect from inclement
weather.
The Tonneau Cover consists of the following features:
Easy roll up cover
Tonneau fore/aft locator
Crossbar inside bed locator
Rear latches
Stowage straps
NOTE:
The Tonneau Cover can be rolled up and secured at the
front of the truck bed without removing it completely.
TONNEAU COVER INSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:
1. Position the rolled up Tonneau Cover on the truck
bed and align it to the two fastener locations at the
front of the bed.
Fastener Locations
2. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, secure the fasteners
to the bed.
3. Lower the tailgate to the fully open position before
unrolling the Tonneau Cover.
4. Release the stowage straps used to secure the
Tonneau Cover in the rolled up position.
Release Stowage Strap
5. Roll the Tonneau Cover rearward toward the back of
the truck bed.
Roll Tonneau Cover Rearward
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
6. Position both Tonneau Cover latches over the locking
mechanisms (one on each side of the truck bed),
making sure the plastic retainer is correctly seated in
the forward part of the latch.
Correctly Seated Retainer
Incorrectly Seated Retainer
7. Once the rear Tonneau Cover bar is positioned over
the locking mechanism, grab the back of the Tonneau
Cover and push downward on the center to engage
the locking mechanisms. Make sure an audible
“click” from both sides of the Tonneau Cover is heard
to confirm that the latch is completely engaged.
Push Downward To Lock
NOTE:
If desired, the Tonneau Cover can be left in this position
(rear panel folded forward) while the tailgate is closed, or
the tailgate can be raised to the mid-position
Ú page 101.
Tonneau Cover With Tailgate In Mid-Position
8. Fold the rear panel down; the tailgate can now be
raised and secured in place.
NOTE:
If not leaving the tailgate in the mid-position, the Tonneau
Cover must be closed completely prior to fully closing the
tailgate.
CAUTION!
Do not sit on the Tonneau Cover; damage to the cover
and/or cargo will occur.
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, proceed as follows:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Fold the rear panel of the Tonneau Cover forward to
reveal the red release straps.
Release Strap Location
3. Pull one of the red release straps to release the
Tonneau Cover latch.
NOTE:
Pulling either strap will release the latches to roll the
Tonneau Cover up; there is no need to pull both at the
same time.
4. Roll the Tonneau Cover forward, starting with the
rear bar and continue to roll toward the front of the
truck bed.
Roll Tonneau Cover Forward
5. Using the stowage straps, secure the Tonneau Cover
in the rolled up position.
Secured Tonneau Cover
6. Using a #T50 Torx head driver, remove the two
fasteners securing the Tonneau Cover to the front of
the truck bed.
Fastener Locations
7. Utilizing two people, lift the Tonneau Cover up and
away from the truck bed.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been completely rolled up,
and straps are secure, before removing.
8. Store in a safe location.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
ONLY.
The Roof Luggage Rack is designed to allow for carrying an
additional cargo load on vehicles equipped with a Hard
Top. The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg), this
includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should be
uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be
sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should
be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
CAUTION!
2
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GASOLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1.
Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2.
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.
3.
Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 113.
4.
Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located
Ú page 177.
5.
Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer
in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended that you call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
DIESEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1.
Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2.
Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.
3.
Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 113.
4.
Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located
Ú page 177.
5.
Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles
(kilometers) in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. The driver interactive
display, located in the instrument panel, indicates how
systems are operating and gives you warnings when a
system, or systems, needs your attention. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and
enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want to make selections and
adjustments.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer
in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended that you call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center of
the instrument cluster. The display contains different
areas of vehicle information.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The top line where Reconfigurable Telltales, Compass
Direction, Outside Temperature, Time, Range, Audio
Info, MPG or Trip are displayed. This also displays the
Speedometer which is an option for the upper center
reconfigurable, but is not the default. Default setting is
Menu Title.
The main display area where the menus and pop-up
messages are displayed.
The lower line where telltales, menu name and menu
page are displayed.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow button allow you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
They allow you to change the Main Screen area and Menu
Title area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow button allow you to
cycle through the submenu screens of the Main menu
item.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. To
reset displayed/selected features push and hold the
OK button for two seconds.
OIL LIFE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the
OK button until the gauge resets
to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
If necessary, repeat this procedure.
OFF ROAD+ DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
When the Off Road+ button is pushed in the switch bank,
the Instrument Cluster Display will begin to show
messages related to the feature. Depending on the
Four-Wheel Drive mode in use, the messages will differ,
and after five seconds, all messages will clear from the
display. The messages are as follows:
2H: Off Road+ Unavailable, Shift to 4WD
4H: 4WD High Off Road+ Active
4L: 4WD Low Off Road+ Active
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Cruise Control are not
available when using Off Road+. If either option is
selected, a dedicated message will display indicating that
the features are not usable concurrently. Messages are as
follows:
4H: Cruise Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in
Off Road+
4H: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Unavailable in Off Road+
4L: Cruise Control — Cruise Control Unavailable in
4WD Low
4L: Adaptive Cruise Control — Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Unavailable in 4WD Low
NOTE:
The behavior of Electronic Stability Control while in
Off Road+ varies depending on the 4WD status. If the
vehicle is in 4WD High, Traction Control is automatically
turned off. Also, holding the ESC OFF button for five
seconds will turn off ESC. In 4WD Low, Electronic Stability
Control automatically shuts off regardless of the Off Road
Status.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
Speedometer
Driver Assist —
If Equipped
Messages
Vehicle Info Trip Info Screen Setup
Fuel Economy Stop/Start Audio
Off Road —
If Equipped
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle
between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
left or right
arrow button to scroll through the information submenus
and push and release the
OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
Off Road — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
left or right
arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and numer-
ical value of calculated average front wheel angle from
the steering wheel orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock” graphic only
during 4WD High, 4WD Auto, or 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (if equipped): displays
front and rear or rear only axle locker graphic, and sway
bar connection graphic with text message (connected
or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic with
the angle number on the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch
and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the
graphic will be grayed out. A message indicating the
necessary speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the
ACC system.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the steering
wheel), and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
Tire Pressure Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature
— Automatic Transmission
Only
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Level — If Equipped
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Ú page 162.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset
average fuel economy feature.
Toggle
left or right to select a display with or without
Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated distance
(mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining
in the tank. When the Range value is less than 10 miles
(16 km), the Range display will change to a “LOW”
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the
vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a new
Range value will display. Range cannot be reset
through the
OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will
greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle,
regardless of the Range displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, L/100km, or km/L) since the last reset.
Current – The display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, L/100km, or km/L) while driving.
Trip
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display, then push and release the
left or right
arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start
status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. The screen will display the Stop/Start
status.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will
display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the
phone is answered or ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the previous media
source information displayed on the screen. When the
pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the
last used screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the
right arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope, and “No Stored Messages” will display.
Screen Setup
NOTE:
The Screen Setup feature can only be used while the
vehicle is not in motion.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location in which that
information is displayed.
NOTE:
Based upon equipment options and current vehicle
status, some of the features may not be available.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display — If Equipped
Full
Single
Current Gear
Off
On
Odometer
Show
Hide
Defaults
Cancel
Restore
BATTERY SAVER ON, BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE, AND ELECTRICAL
L
OAD REDUCTION ACTIONS
(I
F EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
Upper Left
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Upper Right
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Upper Center
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range to Empty Trip A Distance
Audio Average Econ Trip B Distance
Outside Temp Menu Title Speedometer
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info
Off Road —
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Driver Assist —
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Fuel Economy
(show/hide)
Trip Info
(show/hide)
Stop / Start —
If Equipped
Audio (show/
hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle
Settings —
If Equipped
Favorite Menus
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 123.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of the charging
system. The charging system is still functioning prop-
erly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any
(load and ignition off draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
DIESEL DISPLAYS
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages display in the instrument cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at Consistent
Speeds to Clear
Exhaust Filter Full – Power Reduced See Dealer
Exhaust System Service Required – See Dealer
Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service Required
See Dealer
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process Continue
Driving
Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
M
ESSAGES
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions
standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated
into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to
allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or
interaction on your part.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional
maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. Refer to
the following messages that may be displayed on your
instrument cluster display:
Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at Consistent
Speeds to Clear — This message will be displayed if the
exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum
storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short
duration and low speed driving cycles, your diesel
engine and exhaust after-treatment system may never
reach the conditions required to cleanse the filter to
remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the “Exhaust
Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to
Remedy” message will be displayed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition. By simply driving your vehicle at
highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy
the condition in the particulate filter system and allow
your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system
to cleanse the filter to remove the trapped PM and
restore the system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System Regeneration in Process Continue
Driving — This message indicates that the DPF is
self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving condition
until regeneration is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed —
This message indicates that the DPF self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear
one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust System Service Required — See Dealer —
This message indicates regeneration has been
disabled due to a system malfunction.
At this point the engine Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument panel
will display a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) light.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer —
This message indicates the PCM has derated the
engine to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to
the after-treatment system. If this condition is not
corrected and a dealer service is not performed, exten-
sive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To
correct this condition it will be necessary to have your
vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your
oil and resetting the oil change indicator by 0 miles
(0 kilometers) remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust
filter from performing its cleaning routine. This will shortly
result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced
engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to
correct this condition.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
The engine may be switched off even if the warning
light is on: repeated interruptions of the regeneration
process could cause an early deterioration of engine oil.
For this reason it is always advisable to wait for the
symbol to go off before turning off the engine, following
the previously mentioned instructions. Do not complete
the DPF regeneration process when the vehicle is
stopped.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
system could occur soon with continued operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
system could occur soon with continued operation.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
FUEL SYSTEM MESSAGES
The following chart contains a list of different messages that may appear in the instrument cluster, depending on different system or fuel conditions. Use the descriptions to interpret
what the message means and determine the best action to take.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Warning Messages:
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue®
(UREA) Level Warning
The first low level warning will be given at around a 1,490 miles (2,400 km) range, and is determined according to the current
consumption rate. The “UREA Low Level” warning light and message will display on the instrument panel. The UREA low level warning
light will remain lit until the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is topped up with at least 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of UREA.
If the level is not resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to
start the engine.
When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a message will appear on the instrument panel,
accompanied by a buzzer sound. When the range is at 0, the display will show a dedicated message (if equipped). In this case, the
engine will not restart.
It will be possible to restart the engine again as soon as AdBlue® (UREA) is added; the minimum amount required is 1.32 gallons
(5 Liters). Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at least 1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of UREA. If filling is completed with
autonomy tank AdBlue® (UREA) to zero, it could be possible to wait 2 minutes before starting the vehicle.
NOTE:
When the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, and the vehicle is stopped, it is no longer possible to restart the vehicle until a minimum of
1.32 gallons (5 Liters) of AdBlue® (UREA) is added to the AdBlue® (UREA) tank.
Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Fault Warning Messages:
Engine Will Not Restart Service AdBlue®
System See Dealer
This message will display if the AdBlue® (UREA) system issue detected is not serviced during the allowed period. Your engine will not
restart unless your vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer. If the level is not resolved, an additional warning appears whenever a
certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to start the engine. When 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the
AdBlue® tank is empty, a message will appear on the instrument panel, accompanied by a buzzer sound.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light is not on during
startup, stay on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
Engine Will Not Start Service AdBlue®
System See Dealer
NOTE:
The display may take up to five seconds to update after adding 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) or more of AdBlue® (UREA) to the AdBlue®
(UREA) tank. If you have a fault related to the AdBlue® (UREA) system, the display may not update to the new level. See an authorized
dealer for service.
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures lower than 12°F (-11°C). If the car stands for a long time at this temperature, refilling could be
difficult. For this reason, it is advised to park the vehicle in a garage and/or heated environment, and wait for the AdBlue® (UREA)
to return to liquid state before topping up.
Gasoline Particulate Filter (GPF) System Messages — If Equipped:
Exhaust System Service Required The engine control unit has detected an issue with the gasoline particulate filter system. See an authorized dealer.
Exhaust System Regeneration in
Process Continue Driving
The regeneration procedure is controlled automatically by the engine control unit according to the filter conditions and car use
conditions. The following may occur during regeneration: increased levels of Noise Vibration and Harshness (NVH) and reduced engine
performance. The driver should continue driving normally. This message will continue to appear until regeneration is complete.
Exhaust System Regeneration Complete The exhaust gas filter regeneration has been completed. This message will briefly appear.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
Ú page 156.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 325.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate, and a chime
will sound, to indicate low engine oil pressure.
If the light and chime turn on while driving,
safely stop the vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible. After the vehicle is safely stopped,
restart the engine and monitor the Oil Pressure Warning
Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated,
turn the engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for
further assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until the
cause is corrected. If the light is no longer illuminated, the
engine can be operated but it is recommended to take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 277.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition
is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will
turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner
information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at
the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the
unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound
Ú page 277.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally. If Manual transmission equipped, this warning
will illuminate to warn of high clutch temperature. This may
occur with driver misuse of clutch pedal or resting foot on
the clutch pedal or partially engaging the clutch for longer
duration. If the light turns on, it will be with an additional
CLUTCH HOT message. Stop the vehicle safely and run the
engine at idle with transmission gear in NEUTRAL (N) until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, follow the
message displayed in the instrument cluster.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel
filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
disengage the light. If the light does not turn
off, please see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire. If you continue to operate the vehicle when the
CLUTCH HOT message is displayed or Transmission
Temperature Warning Light is illuminated, you could
cause the clutch to overheat and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure. If you
continue to operate the vehicle when the CLUTCH HOT
message is displayed or Transmission Temperature
Warning Light is illuminated, you could cause the clutch
to overheat and cause severe clutch damage,
transmission damage or failure.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on until
fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low Ú page 341.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate
loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage.
The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. It is recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 271.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a fault in
the sway bar disconnect system
Ú page 154.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as previously
referenced, can reach higher temperatures than in
normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as
dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire life and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
WARNING!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate along with a
dedicated message on the display (if equipped)
if an unknown fluid not conforming with
acceptable characteristics is inserted, or if an
average consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is
detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
If the problem is not solved, a specific message will appear
on the Instrument Cluster Display whenever a certain
threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to
start the engine.
When about 125 miles (200 km) are remaining before the
AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a continuous dedicated
message will appear on the instrument panel,
accompanied by a buzzer sound (if equipped).
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive part time mode, and the
front and rear driveshafts are mechanically
locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when front and/or rear axle
locker fault has been detected.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated
Ú page 149.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both
axles have been locked. The telltale will display
the lock icon on the front and rear axles to
indicate the current lock status.
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning is off
Ú page 271.
Neutral Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the neutral mode
Ú page 144.
Sway Bar Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Off Road+ Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
Off Road+ has been activated.
Cargo Light On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Bed Lamp has been activated.
Wait To Start Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN position. Its duration
may be longer based on colder operating
conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is
no longer displayed.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start Light may not illuminate if the intake
manifold temperature is warm enough.
Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive
AdBlue® (UREA) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive
AdBlue® (UREA) indicator light illuminates
when the AdBlue® (UREA) level is low.
Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at
least 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of AdBlue® (UREA).
If filling the tank is done with a remaining range of
AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to zero, you may need
to wait two minutes before starting the vehicle.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate
when there is water detected in the fuel filter. If
this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage, and please see an authorized
dealer.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive auto mode. The system will
provide power to all four wheels and shift the
power between the front and rear axles as
needed. This will provide maximum traction in dry and
slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 160.
Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
Ú page 52.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
CAUTION!
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may
cause severe damage to the injection system and
irregular engine operation. If the indicator light is
illuminated, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to bleed the system. If the previously
mentioned indicators come on immediately after
refueling, water or AdBlue® (UREA) have probably been
poured into the tank: switch the engine off immediately
and contact an authorized dealer.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can
be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
been buckled in the second row. A telltale will
display in the upper right corner of the
instrument cluster display to correspond to the
specific seating position once the seat belt has been
buckled
Ú page 277.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped With a
Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
has been turned on, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped With a Base
Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on, but
not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Indicator
Light — If Equipped With a Base Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on, but
not set.
Two-Wheel Drive High Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the Two-Wheel Drive High mode.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt has
been buckled in the second row. A telltale will
display in the upper right corner of the
instrument cluster display to correspond to the
specific seating position once the seat belt has been
buckled.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light indicates when a rear seat belt is
unbuckled in the second row. When the ignition
is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and if a seat belt in the second row is
unbuckled, a light corresponding to the specific seat will
turn on in the upper right portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the configurable corner
information. If a second row seat belt that was buckled at
the start of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the
unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light indicates when the rear passenger
seats are unoccupied, and will illuminate in the
upper right portion of the instrument cluster
display, momentarily replacing the
configurable corner information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the cruise control
has been turned on, but not set.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when cruise control has
been turned on, but not set.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Selec Speed Control
is activated. Selec Speed Control is available in
4WD Low ONLY.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass"
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can be
performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
3
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 199.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states and/or provinces that require an
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
The OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a
battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
133
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking
ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will start
regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by
allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to
press the clutch pedal. The 4WD LOW Indicator Light will
illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into
this mode.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL).
Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The ignition will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pushed once, the transmission will automatically
select PARK and the engine will turn off, however
the ignition will remain in the ACC position
(NOT the OFF position). Never leave a vehicle
out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
3. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button once will turn the engine off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position.
4. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC position
(NOT the OFF position) if the engine is turned off when
the transmission is not in PARK.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the ignition will
cycle to the OFF position after 30 minutes of inactivity if
the ignition is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running)
position and the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To
change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and
use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument
cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the
vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Driver door is ajar or if the driver door is removed and
the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor detects
driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition will change to ACC position.
After 30 minutes the ignition switches to OFF automati-
cally, unless the driver turns the ignition OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
Driver door is ajar or if the driver door is removed and
the driver is not on the seat (seat pad sensor detects
driver missing)
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift To
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is
blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD LOW.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both of
these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until
you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and
on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the “Extended
Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an extended park condition as defined
previously, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 10 seconds. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in
the ON/ RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically and will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 321.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both inside
and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second
intervals. Waiting two minutes between such intervals will
protect the starter from overheating.
NOTE:
Engine start-up in very low ambient temperature could
result in evident white smoke. This condition will
disappear as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission gear selector in the
PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The cartridge block heater clips into the engine block near
the water jacket and transfers heat to the coolant. It
requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord. Its use is
recommended for environments that routinely fall below
-10°F (-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not
been running overnight or longer periods and should be
plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is required for
cold starts with temperatures under -20°F (-28°C).
NOTE:
The engine block heater and heater cord are factory
installed options. If your vehicle is not equipped, engine
block heaters and heater cords are available from an
authorized Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids in
preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in ther-
mostat.
A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine
starting and reduces the amount of white smoke
generated by a warming engine.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The engine is allowed to crank as long as
25 seconds. If the engine fails to start during this
period, please wait at least two minutes for the
starter to cool before repeating start procedure.
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage
Ú page 345.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
(Continued)
NORMAL STARTING
Observe the instrument cluster lights when starting the
engine.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
NOTE:
A delay of the start of up to five seconds is possible under
very cold conditions. The “Wait to Start” telltale will be illu-
minated during the preheat process. When the engine
“Wait To Start” telltale turns off the engine will automati-
cally crank.
3. The system will automatically engage the starter to
crank the engine. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has
turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating
system. If the instructions in this manual are followed, the
engine should start in all conditions and no type of starting
fluid should be used.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the diesel engine is operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
Voltmeter operation.
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various
engine temperatures. This is caused by the glow plug
heating system. The number of cycles and the length of
the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control
module. Glow plug heater operation can run for several
minutes. Once the heater operation is complete the
voltmeter needle will stabilize.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START the engine before you drain the water from the
fuel filters to avoid engine damage
Ú page 345.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may
require special considerations. The following charts
suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels
ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where
extended arctic conditions 0°F (-18°C) exist.
NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD fuel
results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
Climatized ULSD fuel is a blend of Number 2 ULSD fuel
and Number 1 ULSD fuel which reduces the tempera-
ture at which wax crystals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the pump
at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel
Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine and
exhaust system damage
Ú page 394.
If climatized or Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available,
and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), in sustained
arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treat-
ment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
See Engine Fluids and Lubricants for the correct engine oil
viscosity
Ú page 397.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold. When
starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to operating
speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the
engine warms up.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the engine
at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are
applied.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may be
harmful to your engine because combustion chamber
temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn
completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings, cylinder head valves,
turbocharger, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned
fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing
rapid wear to the engine.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
STOPPING THE ENGINE
After full load operation, idle the engine for a few minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the
turbocharger.
NOTE:
Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the Stop/Start system may be
temporarily disabled and the engine fan will run after the
engine is turned off to protect the engine. These condi-
tions are under high load and high temperature condi-
tions.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS — AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
To reduce the potential for engine and transmission
overheating in high ambient temperature conditions, take
the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
NOTE:
If the coolant temperature is too high, the A/C will auto-
matically turn off.
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine as soon
as possible. After the vehicle is safely stopped, restart the
engine and monitor the lamp. If the lamp is still
illuminated, shut the engine off, contact an authorized
dealer, and do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. If the lamp is no longer illuminated, the engine
can be operated, but should be taken to an authorized
dealer as soon as possible for further inspection.
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the parts fail.
Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and
visual evidence that the engine requires service. Some
important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Sudden loss of power
Unusual engine noises
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
Sudden change, outside the normal operating range, in
the engine operating temperature
Excessive smoke
Oil pressure drop
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades see
Ú page 397.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
The diesel engine does not require a break-in period due
to its construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing
the following recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent
engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying
or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load
operation will extend the time before the engine is at full
efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen
at this time.
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could result
in immediate and severe engine damage.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
(Continued)
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 397.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST
NEVER BE USED.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light
will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will
sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an automatic trans-
mission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-
mission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE
or FIRST gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking
brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is
normal.
Manual Transmission Shifter
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place
the gear selector into the desired gear position (the
diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on
the handle of the selector). The gear position will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift
the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the
gear selector all the way left and then forward.
SHIFTING
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting from a
standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal.
This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is
idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal
released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise
may also be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on or partially
pressing the clutch pedal. Never attempt to hold the
vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
engaged. Operating vehicle in this manner may
cause the clutch to overheat and cause permanent
damage to the clutch. If you continue to operate the
vehicle in this manner, the “CLUTCH HOT” message
or Transmission Temperature Warning Light will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. For more infor-
mation
Ú page 122.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
selector as the force exerted, even if slight, could
lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox
internal components.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
(Continued)
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds
listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up shift speeds may not apply.
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the preceding chart are for 2H
and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
Above certain speeds, downshifts may be blocked and not
available.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip,
and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems. Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal pressed may result in damage to
the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
pressed could result in clutch damage.
CAUTION!
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the preceding chart are for 2H
and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly
less.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
system which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This
helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition
is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is
OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
8–SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. To
shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster
Ú page 148.
Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward), it
is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake
Shift the transmission into PARK
Turn the ignition off
Remove the key fob from the vehicle
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the transfer
case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
The DRIVE position should be used for all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 148. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build-up.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 190.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 328.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
enables full manual control of transmission shifting also
known as AutoStick mode. Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
position will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 148.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver
of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indi-
cates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diag-
nostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into
the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position).
The current transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the
gear selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift
the transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-)
while in the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector
rearward (+) will command an upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as follows:
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND gear
(or THIRD gear, in 4L range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND
or THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will
downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible
at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not
active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
FOUR-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides four positions:
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
N (Neutral)
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case position, see the following information:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle.
See Recreational Towing for further information
Ú page 190.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions, such as
hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and
4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the
4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. For further information on shifting into 4H or
4L
Ú page 150.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would
be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pres-
sures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle
is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with
the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is
completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE
or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to
the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
During cold weather, you may experience increased
effort in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up.
This is normal.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
FIVE-POSITION TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides five positions:
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
4H AUTO (Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range)
4H PART TIME (Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High
Range)
N (Neutral)
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case position, see the following information:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends
power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will
be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss
of traction. This range provides additional traction for
varying road conditions.
4H PART TIME
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction for loose, slippery road
surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle
Ú page 190.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in the
two-wheel drive position (2H) or four-wheel drive position
(4H AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry
hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the 4H AUTO mode can be
used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2H mode.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and
4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces
only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the
4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. For further information on shifting into
4H or 4L
Ú page 152.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are
locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause
damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H TO 4H AUTO OR 4H AUTO TO 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed
would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
2H/4H AUTO TO 4H PART TIME OR 4H PART
TIME TO 2H/4H AUTO
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can be
made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred
shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h).
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not
accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a
constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft
speeds must be equal for the shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experi-
enced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pres-
sures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
4H PART TIME/4H AUTO TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
PART TIME/4H AUTO
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the
clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle
is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with
the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is
completed, place the automatic transmission into DRIVE
or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to
the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
During cold weather, you may experience increased effort
in shifting until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is
normal.
TRAC-LOK REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to
both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential
automatically proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum
traction.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position completely
can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and
vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive
the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) FRONT AND
R
EAR — IF EQUIPPED
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in ON/RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Four-Wheel
Drive Low Range).
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same
speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down
to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will illuminate),
push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the
“FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear axle is
locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or
unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked
or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range), or the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position.
The Axle Lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once vehicle
speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
AXLE LOCK (TRU-LOK) REAR ONLY —
I
F EQUIPPED
The rear axle may be locked in 4H if the proper conditions
are met.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel
(to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H (Four-Wheel
Drive High Range).
The vehicle must be in OFF ROAD+ active
Ú page 155.
Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode
Ú page 262.
Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip or tight
cornering condition.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down
to lock the rear axle only (“REAR ONLY” will illuminate).
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4H
(Four-Wheel Drive High Range), OFF ROAD+ is turned off
by the driver, ESC “Full Off” is exited, or the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is fully
locked or unlocked.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control
of your vehicle.
WARNING!
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
The rear Axle Lock system may temporarily disengage the
rear locker under some conditions.
If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically re-lock as
soon as the system allows.
If an Axle Lock request cannot be completed by the system
within 5 seconds due to vehicle operating conditions not
being correct, the request will be canceled and the driver
may need to re-request the locker to be activated.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows
greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located
on the instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to disconnect or connect the
sway bar. The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
disconnected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash
during activation transition, or when activation conditions
are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or
4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road
position
Ú page 149. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will
flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully
disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left
and right suspension height differences. This condition is
due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In
order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This
alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level
ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch
again.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before
driving on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar
may contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury. Under certain
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances
vehicle stability and assists with vehicle control. The
system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or
solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once vehicle speed is
reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system will once
again attempt to return to off-road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash in the
instrument cluster and vehicle stability may be
reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
(29 km/h) with a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may
contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
OFF ROAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
OFF ROAD+ Switch
When activated, OFF ROAD+ is designed to improve the
user experience when using specific Off Road driving
modes. To activate Off Road+, push the OFF ROAD+ switch
in the switch bank. The vehicle’s performance will improve
depending on which Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode is
activated.
NOTE:
OFF ROAD+ will not function in Two-Wheel Drive High (2H)
mode. If the button is pushed while in 2H mode, the
cluster display will show the message “OFF ROAD+
Unavailable Shift to 4WD”.
When OFF ROAD+ is active, the following features will
activate:
The OFF ROAD+ telltale will illuminate in the Instrument
Cluster Display
A mode specific message will display the Instrument
Cluster Display
Off Road pages will launch on the radio head-unit
(if equipped)
The Off Road Camera will launch (if equipped)
Once in OFF ROAD+, the vehicle will begin to behave in
different ways depending on the 4WD mode in use.
The following enhancements will occur when using
OFF ROAD+.
4L
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl and
controllability focus, change in shifting schedule when
rock crawling, pedal calibration shifted to de-gain and
low range, operates at lower vehicle speeds
Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differential
tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
OFF ROAD+: Recall the last status between ignition
cycles
4H
Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved sand
performance/wheel slip focus, change in shift
schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration set to
aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle speeds
Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning brake
lock differential with no engine management
Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlimited
speed
OFF ROAD+: Will default to OFF between ignition cycles
Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will not
function while using OFF ROAD+. A dedicated cluster
message will display indicating this if either feature is
activated while in OFF ROAD+.
If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in OFF ROAD+, the
following will occur on the vehicle:
Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control will turn
off, but Stability Control will remain active.
Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Traction
Control and Stability Control will turn off.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electro-Hydraulic Power
Steering system that will provide increased vehicle response
and ease of maneuverability. If the Electro-Hydraulic Power
Steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing power steering assist, then the system will provide
mechanical steering capability.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a flashing icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized
dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance
Ú page 113.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates
that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred,
which caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over
and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns
off
Ú page 113.
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically
driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
Ú page 113.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine-running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
Battery charge is low
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed
HVAC is set to MAX A/C
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
Engine or exhaust temperature is too high
The transmission is not in a forward gear
Hood is open
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure
Accelerator pedal input
Vehicle speed threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop
Steering angle is beyond threshold
ACC is on and speed is set
Vehicle is at high altitude
System fault is present
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a
STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions
of the items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted
Battery voltage drops too low
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
A Stop/Start system error occurs
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five minutes
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “Stop/Start OFF” message will appear in instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start section, and the
autostop function will be disabled
Ú page 113.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 113.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Pressing the clutch pedal will
automatically restart the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery
used to power the Stop/Start system and the 12 Volt
vehicle electrical system. The secondary battery is located
behind the wheel well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
engine start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY
until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into an STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster
Ú page 113.
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and
the clutch pedal must be fully released.
The engine will shut down,
the tachometer will fall to the
Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
message will appear, and the heater/air conditioning
(HVAC) air flow will be reduced.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
In following situations the engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or
greater than 109°F (43°C)
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature
Battery is discharged
When driving in REVERSE
Hood is open
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is open
Vehicle is at high altitude
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Forward Gear is engaged
Steering angle is beyond threshold
System fault is present
HVAC is set to MAX A/C
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed previously.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will start
when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require
complete/full pedal press). The vehicle will go into
STOP/START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE
mode, the engine will start automatically when:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than
temperature set on Auto HVAC
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five minutes
Battery voltage drops too low
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h)
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed
Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral)
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold
(ESS Models Only)
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “Stop/
Start OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster
display within the Stop/Start section, and the Autostop
function will be disabled
Ú page 113.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 113.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control system takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Cruise Control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always ensure the system
is off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)
Vehicle is operating at a low RPM
(manual transmission only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently if your vehicle is not
equipped with ACC
Ú page 160.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward-facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 404.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off and do not use:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations
(i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the manual transmission is in first gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
(manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When ESC Full Off mode is active
When Off Road+ (if equipped) is active
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Distance Decrease Button
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below
20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake system (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
system (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
(manual transmission only)
The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds
(manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than
10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to FIRST gear
(manual transmission only)
Vehicle is operating at a low RPM
(manual transmission only)
When Off Road+ (if equipped) is enabled
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not enabled),
the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition,
the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm
will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last
set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will
cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button,
the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a vehicle in front. If your vehicle follows
a vehicle ahead to a standstill, your vehicle brakes will
release two seconds after coming to a full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set
with Target Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages
Ú page 163
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following the vehicle in front, your vehicle
will resume motion without the need for any driver action
if the vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds of
your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display the above message and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the windshield and forward-facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be
an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later,
following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver). For system limitations and usage precautions,
see
Ú page 173.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning will
appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the
vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The system
will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in
the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type
and orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 113. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center front
region with no chime. As the vehicle moves closer to the
obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer
to the vehicle and a fast sound tone will be heard and will
change from fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is
detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Slow
(for rear
center only)
Fast
(for rear
center only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
the brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable.
The settings may be programmed through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 199.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS”, “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will display a
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap,
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn the ParkSense system off, the instru-
ment cluster display will show a vehicle graphic of the
ParkSense on/off state for two seconds. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
tion and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show the “ParkSense OFF”
message. This message will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) of the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in
the lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate could
provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE. The image will
be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the
tailgate, above the vehicle license plate.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview camera
function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Go to the Controls screen by pressing the Controls
button located on the bottom of the Uconnect
display, and then press Back Up Camera.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
delay turned on, the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the
touchscreen X button to disable display of the
Rear View Camera image is pressed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls menu,
and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen X button,
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the “magnifying
glass” icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that allows
you to you see an on-screen image of the front view of your
vehicle. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen
display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
Front View Camera
NOTE:
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam system has programmable settings that may
be selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 199.
Manual Activation Of The TrailCam
TrailCam view can be activated via the below methods:
Press the FWD Camera button on the controls screen.
Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the apps
menu.
Press the TrailCam button on the Off Road Pages.
Press the Off Road+ button when Auto Launch
Off Road+ (if equipped) has been selected under
camera settings.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the Back Up Camera view. The Back Up
Camera view can also be activated by pressing the
icon on the TrailCam view.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
Delay turned off and TrailCam view is active, the TrailCam
mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
Delay turned on and the TrailCam view is active, the
TrailCam image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to disable
display of the TrailCam view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through the
Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle speed is
greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer
for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in 2WD or 4WD High, the TrailCam image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button, the transmission is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of the
vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
Cleaning The TrailCam
Press and hold the Clean Camera button located on the
TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. Washer fluid will stop
when the button is released.
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a time
while holding the button.
The Clean Camera system is not available when
windshield washing is in process.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are projected on
the ground plane of the TrailCam view based on the
steering wheel position.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is located on the left side of the vehicle.
To access the fuel filler cap, push on the fuel filler door to
unlatch it. To close the fuel filler door, push on it a second
time. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counterclockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
3. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
Fill the vehicle with fuel.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full. Wait five seconds before removing the
fuel nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is prop-
erly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
nate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking"
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the
vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fuel Filler Door
2. Remove the diesel fuel filler cap by rotating it counter-
clockwise.
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — DEF Filler
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
3. Fully insert the diesel nozzle into the filler pipe. Fill the
vehicle with fuel.
4. When the nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow excess fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the diesel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is prop-
erly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL
will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause
severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper
maintenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is
essential see
Ú page 345.
BULK FUEL STORAGE — DIESEL FUEL
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the
stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with water
will promote the growth of “microbes.” These microbes
form “slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system and
lines. Drain condensation from the supply tank and
change the line filter on a regular basis.
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel, air is
pulled into the fuel system.
If the vehicle will not start see
Ú page 347.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent diesel
emissions standards required by the Environmental
Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of
NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) that are
harmful to our health and the environment to a near-zero
level. A small quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is
injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where,
when vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides
(NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O),
two natural components of the air we breathe. You can
operate with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing
to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
injection system and a Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following
components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF Lines
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable the
achievement of diesel emissions requirements; while
maintaining outstanding fuel economy, drivability, torque
and power ratings.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
For system messages and warnings see Ú page 113.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system.
You may occasionally hear an audible clicking noise
from under the vehicle at a stop. This is normal opera-
tion.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine
shutdown to purge the DEF system. This is normal
operation and may be audible from the rear of the
vehicle.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable
product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept in
temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and 32°C), it
will last a minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures.
For example, DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below
12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to operate
in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact with
DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or stainless
steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless
steel should be avoided as they are subject to corro-
sion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster display)
will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank
Ú page 113.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will
affect the amount of DEF that is used in your vehicle.
DEF FILL PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For the correct DEF fluid type see Ú page 397.
1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in fuel door).
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill inlet.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a
fault related to the DEF system, the gauge may not
update to the new level. See an authorized dealer
for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately update
after a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is
below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF line heater will
possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run time. Under
very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge
may not reflect the new fill level for several drives.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result in
a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccurate level read-
ings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start refilling and
stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indi-
cates that the DEF tank is full). Do not proceed
with the refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
(Continued)
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before
pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF tank.
If systems which cannot be screwed in (e.g. tanks)
are used for refilling, after the indication appears
on the instrument panel display
Ú page 113 fill
the DEF tank with no more than 2 gal (8 L).
If containers which can be screwed to the filler are
used, the reservoir is full when the DEF level in the
container stops pouring out. Do not proceed
further.
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any of the
following happen: DEF stops flowing from the fill
bottle into the DEF fill inlet, DEF splashes out the fill
inlet, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR on front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” the
DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
temperatures below the DEF freezing point, however,
if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could
be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with
water and use an absorbent material to soak up the
spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is acciden-
tally added to the diesel fuel tank as it can result in
severe damage to your engine, including but not
limited to failure of the fuel pump and injectors.
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank –
especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel
fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other
petroleum-based product. Even a very small amount
of these, less than 100 parts per million or less than
1 oz. per 78 gal (295 L) will contaminate the entire
DEF system and will require replacement. If owners
use a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling the
tank, it should either be new or one that has only
been used for adding DEF. Mopar® provides an
attachable nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
CAUTION!
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR.
If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to
front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations
are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 181.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 2,000 lb (907 kg) or more, it
is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 181.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed between
the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It typically
provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a Weight-Distributing (load
equalizing) Hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional informa-
tion.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height from the top of the front fender to
ground, this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front fender to
ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s recommen-
dations so that the height of the front fender is
approximately H1 (H2=H1).
6. The truck can now be driven.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain in this section.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
Sport - Manual Transmission 9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
Sport - Automatic Transmission 9,650 lb (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Diesel Sport - Automatic
Transmission
12,100 lb (5,488 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 650 lb (295 kg)
Diesel Sport - Automatic
Transmission (Tow Package)
12,100 lb (5,488 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 650 lb (295 kg)
Sport - Automatic Transmission
(Max Tow Package)
12,800 lb (5,806 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,650 lb (3,470 kg) 765 lb (347 kg)
Sport S - Manual Transmission 9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
Sport S - Automatic Transmission 9,650 lb (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When using a fascia/bumper mounted ball on any model, the trailer weight is limited to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg), 30 ft
2
(2.79 m
2
) frontal area, and 350 lb (159 kg) tongue weight.
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on
the Tire And Loading Information Placard
Ú page 369.
Diesel Sport S - Automatic
Transmission
12,100 lb (5,488 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 650 lb (295 kg)
Diesel Sport S - Automatic
Transmission (Tow Package)
12,100 lb (5,488 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 650 lb (295 kg)
Sport S - Automatic Transmission
(Max Tow Package)
12,800 lb (5,806 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,650 lb (3,470 kg) 765 lb (347 kg)
Overland - Manual Transmission 9,100 lb (4,128 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,000 lb (1,814 kg) 400 lb (181 kg)
Overland - Automatic
Transmission
9,650 lb (4,377 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Diesel Overland - Automatic
Transmission
12,100 lb (5,488 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 650 lb (295 kg)
Diesel Overland - Automatic
Transmission (Tow Package)
12,100 lb (5,488 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 650 lb (295 kg)
Mojave - Manual Transmission 9,900 lb (4,491 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Mojave - Automatic Transmission 11,450 lb (5,194 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,000 lb (2,722 kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Rubicon - Manual Transmission 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
40 ft
2
(3.72 m
2
)
4,500 lb (2,041 kg) 450 lb (204 kg)
Diesel Rubicon - Automatic
Transmission
11,800 lb (5,352 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
6,000 lb (2,722 kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Rubicon - Automatic Transmission 12,450 lb (5,647 kg)
55 ft
2
(5.11 m
2
)
7,000 lb (3,175 kg) 700 lb (317 kg)
Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle
The weight of the driver and all passengers
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire And Loading Information Placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure, or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 369.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an elec-
tronic brake controller is not required.
NOTE:
This vehicle has an aftermarket brake controller
connector under the dash to the left of the brake pedal.
This will be a four pin connector and will be gray in color.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an acci-
dent.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping and backing the
trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions, will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build-up. This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle
speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral), auto-
matic transmission must be in PARK, and manual trans-
mission must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine off.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into DRIVE or REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there
is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual
transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer
case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in
Neutral) for recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into N (Neutral)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of N (Neutral), the
engine should remain off to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place
manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),
and check that the vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They
are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed
to prevent damage.
1. There are two nuts connecting to the body side and
one bolt connecting to the underbody on each
attachment bracket. There are four attachment
brackets on each side step.
Fastener Locations (One Side)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case
in N (Neutral) and the engine running. With the transfer
case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine is OFF before
shifting the transmission into PARK.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
2. Remove two nuts and one bolt from the underside of
the vehicle for each of the four brackets. Repeat for
other side of vehicle.
Underside Nuts
3. After all bolts and nuts have been removed, pull the
side step assembly off of the vehicle.
4. To reinstall the side steps align the studs to the body
side holes and fasten all nuts on all four brackets.
Then secure all four bolts to the underbody. Repeat
the reassembly procedure for the other side.
Bumper End Cap Removal — If Equipped
The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper can be
removed by the following steps:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel bumpers only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket
(Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap using a T45 Torx bit
screwdriver. Do not remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store
it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and
ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle's
steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is
one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always
keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good
driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or
braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted
speed limits or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use
your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not.
When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for
surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan
your future driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be disabled
during off-road use.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
When To Use 4L Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional traction
and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or
descending steep hills, and to increase low speed pulling
power. This range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided
when in 4L range.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
SNOW
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a quarter turn quickly back
and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the
tires to get fresh traction and help maintain your
momentum.
MUD
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use DRIVE,
with the transfer case in the 4L position to maintain your
momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a quarter turn quickly back
and forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an
increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck.
They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles
getting stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
SAND
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers
and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going
to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce
your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure
will drastically improve your traction and handling while
driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to
normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires
prior to reducing the pressure.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly
while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L range when operating the vehicle on dry
pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine
RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may
cause skidding and loss of control.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
USING A SPOTTER
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires.
This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The
tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall
and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and
make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH,
WASHOUT OR RUT
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a
45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You
should now be able to drive out following the trench you
just created at a 45-degree angle.
CROSSING LOGS
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top
of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease
the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle.
Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the
vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the
weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle
down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the
vehicle off the object.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are
just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You
should always feel confident with the vehicle and your
abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission
into a lower gear with 4L engaged, and proceed with
caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.
DRIVING UP HILL
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up
for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the
hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the
front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to
bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you
approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more
than a quarter turn quickly back and forth. This will provide
a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make
it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back
straight down the grade using engine resistance along
with the vehicle brakes.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast? If you
feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure
you are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which
increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending
a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be
seriously injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to
turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive
straight up or down.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
(Continued)
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know your
vehicle's abilities and be able to recover it if something
goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off
when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into
the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt
to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first.
The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into
FIRST gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L position
and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed (3 to
5 mph {5 to 8 km/h} maximum) and light throttle. Keep
the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the
crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom
of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the
vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine
if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters;
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be
intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle
if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth,
current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on
the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the
depth and the ability to safely cross.
CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
AREAS OR OTHER STANDING WATER
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering.
This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can
cause permanent damage to engine, driveline or
other vehicle components, and your brakes will be
less effective once wet and/or muddy.
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward.
Driving through water may cause damage that may
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
4
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING WATER
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt
to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle
downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very
shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in
jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and
vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance.
You should never attempt to cross flowing water which
is deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current,
the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and
if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
driveline, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission
bell housing for mud and debris and clean as required.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push
your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control.
This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury
or drowning.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
199
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 400, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and Uconnect 4/4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button
on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
All settings should be changed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button at a time
to enter the desired menu. Once in the desired menu,
press and release the preferred setting option until a
check mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
Language
Display
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are “English”, “Français”, and “Español”.
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
Units
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are
“ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Auto Launch with Off-Road+
This setting will determine how the Off-Road feature is launched through the radio when
turning the vehicle on. The options are “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped), and
“Off Road Pages”.
Setting Name Description
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
The setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
Voice
Clock
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
Off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting
out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Front Camera Gridlines This setting will turn the Front Camera Gridlines on or off.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting
out of REVERSE.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Front Camera Gridlines This setting will turn the Front Camera Gridlines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to
shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”,
“60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound
the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to
unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first
push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of
the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to
the key fob.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
AUX Switches
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start
has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
When the AUX button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There
are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power source for the AUX switches can
either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type
and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the
AUX switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”.
Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is
set to Ignition.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when
the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat
This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Doors On Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned on.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease
the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and exit
of the vehicle.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of
the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will
increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound
This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness
This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
SiriusXM® Setup
Reset/Restore Default Settings
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
separate subscription.
When the Reset/Restore Default Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
Clear Personal Data
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Radio Button 5 — Controls Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Climate Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Apps Button
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the radio functions and
external audio sources Ú page 218.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system
Ú page 229.
Settings
Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 199.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the faceplate to turn the
system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the radio manually. Doing this can
also recover the radio screen from freezing.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily customized for your preference. Simply follow
these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the system.
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
BACK Push the BACK button on the faceplate to go back to a previous screen in the headunit.
MUTE/VOLUME
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the MUTE/VOLUME button on the faceplate to mute or
unmute the system.
Feature Description
Controls — If Equipped Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions
Ú page 56.
Feature Description
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and
interact with the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to
do so may result in injury or property damage.
Become familiar with the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle before you drive on the
roadway so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and
will not require prolonged viewing of the screen while
you are driving.
When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only
be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged
viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and
secure location where you can pull over and park safely
to do so.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to
do so may cause injury or damage to the product.
See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level
that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
gency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
from the system. Besides damage to the system,
moisture can cause electric shocks as with any
electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent.
For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50.
Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precau-
tions and directions
Ú page 404.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the
bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track,
or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play. Double
pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM,
can then be selected by pressing the corresponding
button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off
the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a
selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing
the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left
steering wheel audio control button up or down.
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Menu Bar
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different frequency
bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio
screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or
channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to
begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will
automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for
the beep to say a command. See an example:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “
Help”. The system provides you with a list of
commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual
kit for more information.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase.
If you decide to continue your service at the end of your
trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM®
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto
Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite service area
and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to
change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
in underground parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US
residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or
call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of
the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common
to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button,
and Favorite button functions are available in
SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the
touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at
the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of
the content can only be done when the content is previously
rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds
in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing
the All button, the following categories become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen
to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a
channel with the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to
select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the
list tunes the radio to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You can
switch between the radio presets list by pressing the Arrow
button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen.
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a
means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing
the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob or by
pressing the Up or Down Arrow key, located on the right of
the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button or the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted
Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the
Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by
pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing the
X button or the Back Arrow button when in the Browse
Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio
Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can return
to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road
noise.
Surround Sound
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
movie theatre or home theatre system.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected
to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the
setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the
Media sources available. When available, you can select
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info button
on the touchscreen for artist information on the current
song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
USB port, by selecting the USB button on the left side of
the touchscreen, or by selecting the Source Select/Select
Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with
the Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button
on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source
Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port,
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select button (if
equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port
or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the
touchscreen, or under the Source Select button
(if equipped).
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi-
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on
the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds
of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen
to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side
of the browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device.
If supported by the device, you can browse by Folder,
Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button
on the touchscreen on the left side of the screen.
The center of the browse window shows items and their
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by pressing
the Up and Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL
knob can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
to play the selections on the USB device in random order
to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button
Ú page 219.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen
to display the current track information. Press the Info
or X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel
this feature.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can
rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track
(indicated by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above
and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“
Change source to AUX”
“
Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device.
Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a
phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or
“Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number
(“Search for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Blue-
tooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone
for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you push the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give
a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when
you are already in a call or want to make
another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as
“I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
requires more information from the user, it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the
beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a
push of the VR button or the Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your
steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ-
ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ-
ously paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up will not
appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the
touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your
mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device
button.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted
on the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.”
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority.
This phone will take precedence over other paired
phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect”
from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to
the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your
“messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will
sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on
the radio.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth®
settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the system,
a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted
on the device, confirm the PIN shown on the
Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting
“Yes” will make this device the highest priority. This
device will take precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent device paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up a list of paired audio devices.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range.
If you need to choose a particular phone or audio device
follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
“Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
the Settings button located to the right of the device
name for a different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the preferred
“Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of
the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD
(AUTOMATIC PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM
MOBILE PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
ability to download contact names and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook
Ú page 237.
Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are
transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the
next phone connection.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow
button or the Settings Gear button next to the
selected number to display the option’s pop-up.
In the pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an
existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear
icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current
call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile
phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touch-
screen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP).
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button
on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call
button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on
the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without terminating
the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press
the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away
from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when
the entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a
command. Here are some examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“
Dial 123 456 7890”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previously answered incoming phone
number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button and say “
Call”, then pronounce the
name
exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“
Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming text messages. Push
the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re-
peat one of the predefined messages and follow the
system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You
have full responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to
take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming
text messages only. For further information on how to
enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
iPhone® “User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your
vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your requests.
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform
useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel.
After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play
podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages,
and many other useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone.
Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON Mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/
RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 404.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
Uconnect system, and your Android™
6.0 or higher powered smartphone
with a data plan, that allows you to
project your smartphone and a number
of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful information, and
organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they
are needed. Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and
buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android
Auto™, perform the following procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Google
Play store on your Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone to one
of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android
Auto™ app was not downloaded, the first time you
plug your device in the app begins to download. Your
vehicle should be in PARK the first time you use the
app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came
with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may use cellular data
and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right
corner of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Android Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compatible device is connected. You can also launch it by
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communication
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the beep or
tap the Microphone icon to ask Google to take
you to a desired destination by voice. You can
also touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ provides
voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/
(US) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canada).
For further information on the navigation function, please
refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can
stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your
smartphone prior to using Android Auto™ for them to work
with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing through
Android Auto™, select the Uconnect system’s media
screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read out loud,
and place and receive hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible apps
that are available to use with Android Auto™, every time it
is launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to see the
latest list of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™ features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with
its best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s
voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data
plan to project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher to one of the media
USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the Microphone icon within Android Auto™,
to activate its VR, which recognizes natural voice
commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll need
an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0 or higher, an
active data plan, and the Android Auto™ app.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car display,
you need a compatible Android™ smartphone with an
active data plan. You can check which smartphones
are compatible at g.co/androidauto/requirements.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure
way to use your iPhone® in the car, and
stay focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the
vehicle's knobs and controls, and your
voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps,
Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may
or may not be available in every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone®
5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your
iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may
not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to
the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You can also
launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay® icon on the
touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular
coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the
left side of the radio screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using your
iPhone® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make
calls or listen to voicemail as you normally would using Siri
on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering
wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR session, not a Siri
session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes® or
any third party application installed on your
device. Using your iPhone® data plan, you can
also use select third party audio apps including music,
news, sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition
session. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri
to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also
read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able
to read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Apple® Siri to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps that are
available to use, every time it is launched. You must have
the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed
in to the app through your mobile device for it to work with
Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US) or
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canada) to see
the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile
phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay® features may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to
activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to
use a list of your iPhone® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other
countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements
apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® for
the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone pairs to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth®
without any setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while Android
Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth® connections to
function. The connected device is unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay®.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System —
If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the
Uconnect system. For example, if using Android Auto™/
Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text
messages. However, another device can also be paired to
the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source,
so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be launched
from the front and center console USB ports.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS button
are connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on
either the rearview mirror or overhead console, depending
on the vehicle. If these buttons are present in your vehicle,
you have a connected radio and can take advantage of the
many connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS buttons
Ú page 310.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect
system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. To unlock the full
potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, transmission
and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 257.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html or call 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call 1-877-324-9091
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in the
Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives
GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care center via wireless and
landline communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services require an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network compatible with your device.
SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics device, a
cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or reach emergency
support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service delivery
are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather,
damage to the electrical system or other important
parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the government,
Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your
vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or
under a bridge.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and
interact with the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available for all
models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
Vehicle Branded App or your computer.
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Vehicle
Branded App. Use the Vehicle Branded App to easily
search, map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget
where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of
the Vehicle Branded App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use
Uconnect system and SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview Mirror
Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. The SOS Call button
connects you directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care for assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
3.
For customers in the United States, select “Customer
Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email address to
activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial* period
for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started
with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to
continue your services by calling a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Vehicle Branded App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
steps away from using connected services.
Download the Vehicle Branded App to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to open
the app and then set up a PIN.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
For customers in the United States, if your vehicle is not
registered at the dealership, you will have to call the
Customer Care call center from inside your vehicle or
press the in-vehicle registration button. From there,
you will be able to register your vehicle and add your
vehicle’s VIN to your account.
For customers in Canada, register your account via
your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the apps
list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation
email will be sent to the provided email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confirmation
email. It may take a short time before remote
services will be available, but you will be able to
log into the Vehicle Branded App and the
Owner’s Site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up your
four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door
Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your
horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Mobile Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist
Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://www.mopar.com/
en-us.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) provides you with all the information you need,
all in one place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos
about your vehicle's features, and easily access your
manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account. This section will familiarize you with
the key elements of the website that will help you get the
most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Register button and enter your email address and
password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
“Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in using
your email address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM Guardian™
account, such as your contact information, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit
Profile button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, press one of these icons and enter your
four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely
start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn
and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account. For example, any time you use your
remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can
elect to receive a text message, push notification, and/or
E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and
select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian
Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then
“Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” where you
can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address
to notify you, and you can customize the types of
messages.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call — If Equipped
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of
an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle
and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a minor
collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS
button to be connected to a call center agent who can
send emergency assistance to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular
network availability that is compatible with the device in
your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features
of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn
green indicating a call has been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed,
there is a 10-second delay before the SOS call is
placed. The system will verbally alert you that a
call is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS Call button on the rear-
view mirror or overhead console or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10
seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired phone
is disconnected so incoming or outgoing calls will
go through your mobile device versus the
hands-free system which is not available due to
the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is made,
the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care center may be recorded or
monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your
enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services, you consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that
travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services.
In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency
services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and Canada are
unable to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will
NOT work without a network connection compatible
with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop SOS Call
system operation. These include, but are not limited to,
the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is
damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS
signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US
or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle must be regis-
tered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active
subscription that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live agent will
contact you through the Uconnect system and alert
emergency services.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is required for
this feature to function.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer-
gency call. To avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
NEITHER THE VEHICLE BRANDED APPS NOR THE
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED SERVICES WILL
OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the air bag system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated,
the air bag system may not be working properly and
the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the
Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a Siri-
usXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent. All occu-
pants should exit the vehicle immediately and move
to a safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and
regular inspection of your vehicle may result in
vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the location
of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of
emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will
remain on the call until emergency services arrive.
NOTE:
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case of
an emergency.
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
Agents can brief first responders of the situation before
they arrive on scene.
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak,
emergency services will be dispatched based on the
last known GPS coordinates.
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are depen-
dent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular
connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite
reception, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply. See terms of
services for complete service limitation.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to
several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely
from your mobile device. These features include locking/
unlocking, remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Vehicle
Branded App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site
(not available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device
And The Vehicle Branded App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your
mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
code established when you activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services). Enter the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to
go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command was
received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username and
password you used when activating your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your
Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to send the
command to by clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands.
Press the desired icon to activate that feature.
Lock
Press this button to lock
your vehicle.
Vehicle Start
Press this button to start
your vehicle.
Horn & Lights
Press this button to sound
the horn and activate your
lights.
Unlock
Press this button to unlock
your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start
Press this button to cancel
remote start.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
code established when you activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services). Please enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know
if the command was received by your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (for
example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care if you
are unable to lock your vehicle through the Vehicle
Branded App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking
for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote
command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door
Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN
appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the
ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without
the keys and from virtually any distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with SiriusXM
Guardian™.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection. If using the Vehicle
Branded App to command your vehicle, your device
must be compatible and be connected to an operable
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote
Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights
activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key is
on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via your
Owner’s Site or through the Vehicle Branded App on your
compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the keys
and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset
climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down
the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an engine that
has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After
15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the
key, the engine will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped
with a factory-installed Remote Start system.
You can set up push notifications every time a command
is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob within the
last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been armed and not
triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel,
along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
transmission.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle must
be started at least once after alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents are not
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact the
Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also
help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any
reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud
and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings
when using this feature. You are responsible for
compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the
location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST button
in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services have been activated, the ASSIST button can
connect you directly to the Customer Care call center
(if equipped). You will be directed to one of the following
four services:
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need a
tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help
anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to activate your
services, renew after your trial has expired, for
in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services, or help answering any general
questions surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features, such as
radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features —
If Equipped
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you will be
presented with your ASSIST options on the touchscreen.
Make your selection by pressing the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US
and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the applicable
feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Acces-
sory) position with a properly functioning electrical
system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you
agree to be responsible for any additional roadside
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to
provide SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services to you, we
may record and monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, whether such conversations are
initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services in your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device,
and may share information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements.
You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording,
monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any
such call recordings.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device, and then send the
route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After
selecting the Location tab at the bottom of the App,
browse through one of the categories provided, or
type the name or keyword in the search box. You can
also select categories such as “Favorites” or
“Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that appears.
Location information will then be displayed on the
map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
your vehicle. You can also call the destination by
pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a
notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the location
of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make
finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Vehicle
Branded App and select the Location tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within
14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects
your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made
your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect
your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously
connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media — can connect over your
private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your
private network access the Web — great for working
and relaxing.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot
while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the
vehicle passengers with an internet access
hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an
access point. The hotspot will allow
Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary
3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The
trial can be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription to
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button
and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the
AT&T portal to get set up.
3.
For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care
agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can change
its name and the password by selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot
App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can
also view the connected devices from the app screen by
pressing the View Connected Devices button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required in order
to purchase and use 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. For more infor-
mation on setting up a Wi-Fi connection, visit https://
myvehicle.att.com.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and
work with law enforcement to help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will work
with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care that
your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent will
ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by
your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded
the Vehicle Branded App, you can push the Settings
menu button on your device, select “Help”, and then
select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care” to make
the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will authenticate
that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the
law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen
vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work with
your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You
will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you
should also contact your insurance company to
inform it of the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
the features and applications in this vehicle when it is
safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving in serious injury or death.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
Monthly Vehicle Health Report — If
Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service
through which a summary of the performance of your
vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month so
you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs.
This is provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, the
Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and transmit
vehicle data to SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as
your vehicle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s
location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle,
and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when you
enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue even if you
cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription unless you
call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell them to
deactivate your connected services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ private
policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must be enrolled in an active subscription
with connected services. If you have concerns about the
operation, function or performance of your vehicle, please
take it to an authorized dealer. This report does not
replace regularly scheduled maintenance. Check the
instrument cluster warning lights and cautions in your
vehicle for the most accurate vehicle health information.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For further
information, go to your Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and
activate services. During this process you will be asked to
provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when
services are needed, or to alert you of other important
information, such as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss
the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen will
dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages
mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen
messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command
your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and
remotely access key services and features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you
can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for help,
or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa, ask
<brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa:
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle name>
with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler
Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of my
<vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for SiriusXM
Guardian™
Ú page 243.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
Amazon Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile
device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand>
Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This will
be the same user name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. There will be additional settings to confirm
on the following screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on
Alexa!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give you
peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road.
You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and
pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use
the Vehicle Branded App to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is
driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that
you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being driven
outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is driven
outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Vehicle Branded App
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Vehicle Branded App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the
username and password you created when you first
set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Vehicle Branded App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can
enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock
button in the app and entering your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle
location, tire pressure warning, and more.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, press the
ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in
your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ Care to remove
your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM Guardian™,
active subscribers can push the ASSIST button (if
equipped) and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on
your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM
Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM
Guardian™ agent or held in a queue until an agent is
available. If you do not have an active subscription, push
the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
touchscreen to activate services.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
button on the mirror or overhead console?
You have
10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to
cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the
SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on
the in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS
Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle
information, such as make and model, is transmitted
along with the last known GPS location.
3.
When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use
the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone
else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
Depending on various conditions, it can take up to
three minutes or more for the request to get to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your Vehicle
Branded App comes in handy for these and other
situations.
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People
sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why
security measures have been engineered into the
Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote services
through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to
protect your passwords and PINs.
4.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App is compatible with
most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle.
Other operating systems may be supported in
the future.
5.
Why is the Vehicle Branded App running slow? The
Vehicle Branded App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send commands to
your vehicle which must have an operable LTE
(voice/data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection. If either your device or your vehicle is in
an area with below average coverage, it may take
longer to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside assistance
call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2.
If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, does it
cover towing or other expenses incurred by using
roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle
may include Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message stating that you have a new route
will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up that
will cancel the route if selected.
3.
Can I select a different route than the most recent
one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the
vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message
offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is
selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your vehicle
may be located by anyone who has your PIN and
access to your account. It is your responsibility to
guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for more
information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take
three minutes or more for the request to get through
to your vehicle.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pushing the red Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To enhance your
privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle,
a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to
activate this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate
your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for
other law enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the service
for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have
purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will
work together with law enforcement to try to locate
your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
3.
Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance rates?
Some insurance providers offer lower rates on
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto
theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services subscription to find out if the
insurance provider can offer you a lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance companies, and
SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an insurance product. You are
responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for your
vehicle and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it can take three
minutes or more for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more
quickly. However its range is limited. For example,
when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you
can use the Vehicle Branded App to remote start your
vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device?
People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which
is why security measures have been engineered into
the Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN help
to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they
happen to find your device.
4.
Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App?
No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in
the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts
the engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5.
Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the
cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the
vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start
button will not stop the vehicle.
6.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
lights?
Depending on various conditions, it can take
three minutes or more for the request to get through
to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote
Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three
minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
account? There are three ways that you can register
your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to an
agent who can assist in registering your new
account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
Select the button to speak with an agent, who can
assist in registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
Enter your email on the touchscreen and then
follow the prompts from the provided email. You
will receive an email with an activation link that
will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the acti-
vation link, you will be prompted to fill out your
information and accept Terms and Conditions.
Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
Guardian™ home page to complete your profile
and demo the remote services.
2.
Why do I need an email address? Without an email
address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM
Guardian™. Customers need to register so they can
subscribe to receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for remote
command requests.
3.
How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN?
Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN during
the registration process. The SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN will be required to authenticate you
when accessing your account via SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call or performing any remote services,
such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4.
What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN?
If you’ve already activated services and forgot your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ payment
account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment
Account address can be updated online, or by calling
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM Guardian™
Payment Account.
6.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ profile?
Your name, home address, phone number, email
address and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be
updated online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and click Save.
7.
Can I try features or packages before I buy them?
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an
included trial period for certain Apps and services.
8.
Can I access every App and service while driving?
No, some applications and services are not available
while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
9.
What happens when my subscription comes up for
renewal? If you have added a credit card to your
account information, your subscription will be
automatically renewed for a term length in
accordance with the service plan that you have
selected at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your
subscription by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Care.
If you have not added a credit card to your account,
SiriusXM Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind you that
your subscription is ending soon.
10.
How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ notifi-
cation preferences? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then
update your preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11.
How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST
button on your rearview mirror or overhead console.
12.
How do I update my credit card information? Login to
your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile, then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
13.
How do I find out how much longer I have on my
subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a sub-
scription to view its expiration date. When your sub-
scription is about to expire, you will receive an email
or letter of notification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from the
date of cancellation for annual plans or longer.
Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes.
If you have an annual subscription, your subscription
will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will be
canceled on the last day of the month in which you
choose to cancel.
16.
What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before
your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll want to
remove your account information. This process
removes all personal information, returns the
Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
and account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system, contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
17.
What if I forgot to remove my account information
before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
18.
What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data), or 5G (data) network connection compatible
with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS
Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data), 5G (data) network. Services that required your
smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance
Call may be functioning if you have an operable
network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which
may include information about your vehicle, your vehicle’s
health and performance, your vehicle’s location, your
utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data.
The collection, use and sharing of this information is
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect Privacy
Policy, which can be found at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This
information may be collected by SiriusXM® Connected
Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the
purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle
health and diagnostic information including location data
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription,
this vehicle diagnostic health information, including
location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle
and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the connected services including SiriusXM
Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent to the collection,
use and disclosure of this information in accordance with
the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared, you must
cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by
contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect
Privacy Policy.
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes.
If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio
Ú page 404.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it will
provide you vehicle status while operating on off-road
conditions. It supplies information relating to the vehicle
ride height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch and
roll of the vehicle.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button on the
touchscreen, and then select Off-Road Pages.
Main Menu
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the selectable
page options. It provides information for the following
items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in
mph (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Off-Road+ Status
3 — Latitude/Longitude
4 — Altitude
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information concerning the
vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
1. Steering angle in degrees
2. Status of Transfer Case
3. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
4. Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil
Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization of
the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Lock Icon
3 — Sway Bar
4 — Front Axle Locker Status
5 — Rear Axle Locker Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Battery Voltage
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Oil Pressure
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
5
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound, as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
NOTE:
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Selec-Speed
Control (SSC), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application, and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by applying the brakes very
quickly, creating the most efficient braking assistance
possible. To receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The ERM system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies
the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power
to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can
only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent
wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety
of others.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped). See Ú page 262 for a complete explanation
of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC system enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
(Continued)
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
attempts may be required to return to “ESC On”.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is active when
"Full Off" mode is enabled by the driver, ESC will not switch
to "Partial Off" mode at any speed and will remain in
"Full Off" mode until Off Road+ is exited or ESC is
re-enabled by the driver.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING!
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS)
is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced
mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If the doors
are detached then the driver's seat belt must be
buckled.)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, see
Ú page 199 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It
functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
(Continued)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Control will prepare the brake system for
a panic stop.
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory notification
of the possible presence of an object, passenger, or pet in
the rear seats if a rear door was opened up to 10 minutes
before the ignition was placed in the ON/RUN position.
RSRA does not directly detect objects, passengers, or pets
in the rear seats. When the previous conditions are met,
RSRA displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to
exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
Ú page 199.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD Low
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively
controlling engine torque and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable SSC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver seat belt is buckled.
The driver is not applying throttle.
The driver door is closed (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, then driver
seat belt must be buckled).
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the
following conditions are met:
The driver releases the throttle.
The driver releases the brake.
The transmission is in any selection other than PARK.
Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The driver door is closed (If doors are attached, the
door must be closed. If doors are detached, then driver
seat belt must be buckled).
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter
‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver, and can
be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. Additionally, the
SSC set speed may be reduced when climbing a grade and
the level of set speed reduction depends on the
magnitude of grade. The following summarizes the SSC
set speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
SSC Target Set Speeds — If Equipped With Off Road+
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 0.9 mph (1.5 km/h)
3rd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
4th = 1.5 mph (2.5 km/h)
5th = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
6th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
7th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. While actively controlling
SSC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the
driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive mode if
active. The differences may be notable to the driver as
a varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override
The driver may override SSC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following
conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h).
SSC will exist immediately.
The driver door opens (Driver door opens if doors are
attached or driver seat belt is unbuckled if doors are
detached).
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC
switch has a light that offers feedback to the driver about
the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated.
These are the normal operating conditions for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
SSC switch but enabled conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when SSC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to overheated
brakes.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
ESC are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations. See
Ú page 182 for further
information.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be
reduced, and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when driving in off-road conditions. The
driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions
and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and
trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear. See
Ú page 199
for more information.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experi-
ence dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mirror
warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or any small
object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended
periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or
other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system
may also detect a blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns, such as a desert,
or parallel to a large elevation drop. If a blockage is
detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe
Rear Corners” message will display in the instrument
cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and
RCP alerts will be disabled.
This is normal operation. The system will automatically
resume function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it
clear of road contaminations.
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. See
Ú page 270 for further information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 404.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert
the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation that
are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP mode, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. The RCP state always
requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
Door Removal
When either the front driver or passenger door is removed,
the instrument cluster will display “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable” and the BSM system will disable. While the
system will continue to indicate whatever blind spot mode
it was previously in within the Uconnect system, no visual
or audible alerts will be provided. As long as the doors are
removed, the instrument cluster will provide the “Blind
Spot Temporarily Unavailable” pop up as a reminder that
the system is disabled every time the ignition is cycled.
Upon re-installation of both doors, the system will resume
functionality based on the personalized mode selected.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings
Ú page 404.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings. See
Ú page 199 for further information.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward collision
button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision
button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited active
braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will reset to “Full On” when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 199.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects closer to
the vehicle. This results in later warnings and provides
less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h),
the system may provide maximum braking to mitigate the
potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the system
to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the pedes-
trian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Control settings
Ú page 199.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning Active
Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or active braking will be available in case of
a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down. The system will not reset to
the default setting when the vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the tire is
inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the
tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be
set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 369 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every
type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling
the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure, unless your vehicle
is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert (TFA) system.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire
Ú page 404.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels, and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance. Customers are encouraged to
use Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels
to ensure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING LOW PRESSURE
WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a
minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different
color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing
the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer
exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and
the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of
the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
Vehicles With A Full-Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor, and can be monitored by
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next
ignition switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning
Light to be on, a chime to sound, an “Inflate to XX”
message to appear in the instrument cluster, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire pressure
value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning
Light as long as none of road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
TIRE FILL ALERT
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature in the apps menu of the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire
Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS system fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects an
increase in tire pressure while filling the tire. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode with the transmission in
PARK for vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission. For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, the parking brake must be applied.
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire
Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in
Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps do not come on
while inflating the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensor may be in an inoperative position,
preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
The Tire Fill Alert system will only inflate or deflate one tire
at a time. Wait until the hazard lights have stopped
flashing for 30 seconds after the desired pressure is
achieved in one tire before switching to another.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to
stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature is set to “Disabled” every time the
ignition is turned to “OFF”. To re-enable the Tire Fill Alert
feature at the next ignition “RUN” state, the customer
must re-enable the feature through use of the customer
settings in the radio.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT — IF EQUIPPED
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional
feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert
system. The system is designed to allow you to select a
pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and rear
axle tires to, and to provide feedback while inflating or
deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located
in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, you will be able
to select a pressure setting for both the front and rear axle
tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure range from
XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting.
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard
pressure label.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. The feature must be
re-enabled through the radio each time the ignition is
placed back in the ON/RUN position
Ú page 199.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
You may also store pressure values chosen for each axle
in the Uconnect system application as preset pressure
values. Up to two sets of preset pressure values can be
stored in the Uconnect system for the front and rear axle.
Once you select the tire pressures for the front and rear
axles that you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin
inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one
tire at a time.
In order to use STFA, the Tire Fill Alert feature must be
enabled through the radio Ú page 199.
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK in vehicles with an automatic transmission, and in
NEUTRAL with the parking brake engaged in vehicles with
a manual transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to
confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflating
the tire, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor may be in an inoperative position, preventing the
TPMS sensor signal from being received. In this case, the
vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
The STFA system will only inflate or deflate one tire at a
time. Wait until the hazard lights have stopped flashing for
30 seconds after the desired pressure is achieved on one
tire before switching to another.
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are inflated/
deflated. The horn will chirp under the following STFA
states:
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure
is reached to let you know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overin-
flated or over-deflated.
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pressure
level.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes
(--) will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no system
fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 296.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 296.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 400 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt
Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves
you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to
Ú page 303. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each seating
position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
Stow Clips Behind Rear Seat
Your vehicle is equipped with a stow clip on the lower trim
next to each of the rear seats. This clip is used to hold the
seat belt out of the path of the seatback when it is being
folded and opened. Only place the seat belt webbing in
this clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave
the webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain
an occupant.
Rear Stow Clip
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the rear seat
stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an
occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly
on the occupant and they could be more seriously
injured in an accident as a result.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
See
Ú page 122 for more information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the
air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed
to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is
designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category other than a
properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or
even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light (an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the
driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light
illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show
that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy
during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air
Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illumi-
nated.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occupant’s
seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat and for
occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult. This could be
a child, teenager, or even an adult.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle
is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag
to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of The
Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located on the overhead sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC uses
the classification to determine whether it should activate
or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright.
Facing forward.
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor.
Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position.
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child or small adult.
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is
unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy even though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT
illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including a
rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD
Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
will not deploy during a collision. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are
placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat* Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and
other relatively light objects
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat**
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
(Continued)
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger
seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the
PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is
riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may
deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even though
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.
This can occur if the child restraint is lighter than the
lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator
Light.
NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD Indi-
cator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow
the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to
activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger
step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,
with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the
floor, and with their back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be
activated for a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult (depending on size) who is seated in the passenger
seat. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an
adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF," the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy in the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
WARNING!
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or
deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in
the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light
goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s
Seated Weight On The Front Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines
the most probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in
deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag causing serious injury or death.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in activation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper
front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever the
OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the
air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not
come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illu-
minate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deac-
tivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify
the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS
components must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side
Air Bags.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine. After an accident, if the vehicle
will not start after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to be
inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was pressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: https://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH)
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors
in the center position. The inner anchorages are
19.2 inches (488 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes
with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 44.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, adjacent to the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind each of the rear seats.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions.
Please
Ú page 302 for typical installation instructions.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below.
Ú page 303 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 305 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 283 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
ALR – Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward-facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The center head restraint can be removed
if it interferes with the installation of the
child restraint.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 305 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 299 for
the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
The Top Tether anchorages are located behind each rear
seating position. To attach the tether strap of the child
restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint and to the tether anchor
directly behind the seat.
2. Release the seat back by pulling the release strap
located on the top of the seat back to provide room to
reach the tether anchor.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may need to
adjust the head restraint (if adjustable) to the upward
position to pass the tether strap underneath the head
restraint and between its posts.
4. Attach the hook to the wire anchorage on the cab
back wall (inside the opening labeled with the tether
anchorage symbol.)
5. Push the seat back rearward until the latch engages
and no red indicator is showing on the strap.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
Tether Anchorage Locations
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 132.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 284.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
press the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully press each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
6
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when your
vehicle is disabled or creating a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear
down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and
an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 404.
The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
These and other connected services will only be oper-
able if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
1 — Assist Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
(Continued)
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be
connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assis-
tance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its loca-
tion. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to an SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the overhead
console or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once
a connection to an SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with the vehicle
occupants, and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS operator until
the SOS operator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The light located within the ASSIST and SOS buttons
will continuously be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P), or a
manual transmission into REVERSE.
5. Cycle the ignition to OFF.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take the vehicle to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked in position.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the right rear seat.
Jack And Tool Location
See the following steps to remove:
1. Fold up the right rear seat.
2. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Removing the Wing Bolt
3. Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove
tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
Jack And Tool Bag
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
NOTE:
If the tailgate is lowered, the jack extension with hook can
be added to this assembly to enable lowering of the spare
tire without having to raise the tailgate.
Assembled For Jack Operation
SPARE TIRE LOCATION AND REMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. The spare tire is secured under the rear of the
vehicle with a winch and cable mechanism.
Spare Tire Location
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to extension 2.
When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension 4 is
positioned correctly over the winch mechanism
adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension 2
3 — Long Extension 3
4 — Long Extension 4
5 — Short Extension With Hook
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp
turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in the
vehicle may move around with force, resulting in
serious injury.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
For spare tire removal, see the following steps:
1. Locate the winch access hole at the rear of the
vehicle.
Access Hole Location
2. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extensions Into The Winch Mechanism
Access Hole
3. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
4. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power
tool may damage the winch.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
(Continued)
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Removing The Retainer
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the
stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts (but do
not remove) by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission to
REVERSE.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown.
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. See the following images for proper jacking
locations.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jack Lifting Point
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the vehicle to
prevent tool damage.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jack Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
ground surface and enough clearance is obtained to
install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise, and remove the jack.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 391. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper locations.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
See the following steps for stowing the flat or spare tire:
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing
upward and toward the rear of the vehicle for
convenience in checking the spare tire inflation.
Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the
wheel.
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it
properly across the wheel opening.
Reinstalling The Retainer
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tubes through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Access Hole
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or power
tool may damage the winch.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot
be overtightened. Push against the tire several times
to ensure it is firmly in place.
Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug
wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Jack And Tool Bag
2. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position
holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, place the jack
and tools under the rear seat.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan.
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp
turns. A loose jack, tools or bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force, resulting in
serious injury.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
(Continued)
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
Supplemental Battery — If Equipped
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the
engine compartment.
Positive (+) Battery Post – Gas Engine
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the main battery
to jump start your vehicle. Serious injury or death
could result if you attempt to jump start using the
supplemental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting.
WARNING!
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Positive (+) Battery Post – Diesel Engine
NOTE:
The positive
(+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it will
be equipped with two batteries Ú page 156.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in
NEUTRAL) and place the ignition in OFF mode.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables
are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle may be equipped with a refueling funnel.
Vehicles with diesel engines will have a cap to remove to
begin the refueling process. If refueling is necessary, while
using an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into
the filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers
with the funnel to avoid spills.
Diesel Fuel Cap
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from under the right rear seat.
Fuel Funnel Location
Refueling Funnel
2. Remove the fuel filler cap and insert the funnel into
same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
6. Tighten the fuel filler cap until clicking is heard.
This is an indication the cap is properly tightened.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — IF EQUIPPED
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of Park (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
See the following steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
manual park release cover located in front of the gear
selector, to access the release tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in the
console base.
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap until the release lever locks into
place in the vertical position. The vehicle is now out of
PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the parking
brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to
a tow vehicle.
Vertical Released Position
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the
“locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever downward into
its original position.
Original Tether Position
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console,
and reinstall the cover.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R)
(with automatic transmission) or SECOND (2) gear and
REVERSE (R) (with manual transmission), while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL(N) for
more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 262. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating
and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed
as described on
Ú page 190.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle
Ú page 325.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
• Automatic Transmission in
PARK (P)
• Manual Transmission in gear (
NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in
NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in
forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA LLC US recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward
direction, with
ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer
case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (P)
(for automatic transmissions) or in gear (
NOT in NEUTRAL,
for manual transmissions)
Ú page 190.
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved method
of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear fascia/bumpers.
Front Tow Hooks
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, rear tow hooks may vary.
Rear Tow Hook
Rear Tow Hooks
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury.
7
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 295.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle
Ú page 296.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Tow straps are recom-
mended when towing the vehicle, chains may cause
vehicle damage.
The tow hooks must not be used to move the vehicle
off the road or where there are obstacles.
Do not use the tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing.
Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle onto a
flatbed truck.
Do not use the tow hooks to free a stuck vehicle
Ú page 327.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines
are not followed
Ú page 328.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
331
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display,
“Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is
necessary.
On vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster
display, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster
odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
To reset the system follow the steps described
Ú page 114.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only
a concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual wear or
damage, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, rear suspension,
tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km),
whichever comes first.
X X
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained
high speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C).
X X X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
X X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, to reset the message
Ú page 113.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the housing
when the new filter is installed if the residual oil is not
either removed from the housing or enough time has not
elapsed to allow the oil to drain back into the engine.
When servicing the oil filter on this engine, open the filter
cap approximately six turns until the cap o-ring is visible
and stop. Wait five minutes with the cap in this position to
allow dirty engine oil to drain back into the engine. After
five minutes, the cap and filter assembly can be removed
and discarded.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire pressures and look for unusual wear or
damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and affect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change fuel filter.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.
Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every other oil change and must not
exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5. If the vehicle is being used in severe
operating conditions, or in certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio,
Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel
cleanliness issues, it is recommended to replace the fuel filter every oil change and must not exceed
10,000 miles.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE — B6 TO B20 BIODIESEL
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six months, whichever comes first when using biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
The owner is required to monitor mileage for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indicator system does not reflect the use of biofuels.
Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every second oil change. This is especially important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel
Ú page 394.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Battery 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.0L DIESEL ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Coolant Pressure Reservoir Cap 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.
Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable.
They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 321.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For the proper engine oil selection Ú page 397.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
If the negative battery cables are not isolated prop-
erly it can cause a potential power spike or surge in
the system, resulting in damage to essential elec-
trical components.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filter varies
considerably. We recommend using a Mopar® engine oil
filter, if a Mopar® engine oil filter is unavailable only use
filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
performance requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals see Ú page 332 for
gas engines or
Ú page 336 for diesel engines.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” mainte-
nance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filter varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filer cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
CAUTION!
All air entering the engine intake must be filtered.
The abrasive particles in unfiltered air will cause
rapid wear to engine components.
Many aftermarket performance air filter elements do
not adequately filter the air entering the engine. Use
of such filters can severely damage your engine.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing only if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners using
a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing only if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners using
a suitable tool.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
The fuel/water separator housing is located inside the left
frame rail in front of the fuel tank. The best access to this
water drain valve is from under the vehicle.
If necessary remove the fuel filter protective cover to
access the water drain valve.
Fuel/Water Separator Filter
If water is detected in the water separator while the engine
is running, or while the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate and an
audible chime will be heard. At this point you should stop
the engine and drain the water from the filter housing.
Fuel/Water Separator Filter
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter housing)
counterclockwise to drain fuel/water; allow the
accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve open
until all water and contaminants have been removed.
When clear fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning
it clockwise.
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel filter
assembly, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain
illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the water was
drained while the engine was running, the Water In Fuel
Indicator Light may remain on for approximately three
minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from your
vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact an autho-
rized dealer, service station, or government agency for
advice on recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
If more than two ounces or 60 ml of fuel have been
drained, follow the directions for Priming If The Engine Has
Run Out Of Fuel
Ú page 347.
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT —
D
IESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet FCA US LLC filtration
and water separating requirements can severely impact
fuel system life and reliability.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel
filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced
into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to
install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Remove the fuel filter protective cover to access the
fuel filter assembly.
Fuel Filter Assembly
3. Place drain pan under the fuel filter assembly.
4. Open the water drain valve, and let any accumulated
water and fuel drain.
5. Close the water drain valve.
Fuel Filter Assembly
6. Wipe clean the underside of the filter housing to
prevent contamination from entering fuel system
during service.
7. Remove the fuel filter cap and filter from the housing
using a socket. Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Fuel Filter Assembly
8. Remove the used fuel filter cartridge from the cap
and dispose of according to your local regulations.
9. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the cap and
housing.
10. Lubricate o-ring on the cap with clean engine oil.
11. Install the new fuel filter cartridge onto the cap.
12. Insert the cap and filter into the housing with
clockwise rotation, use a socket to tighten.
13. After engine start, verify the fuel filter cap does not
leak.
1 — Retainers
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
1 — Water Drain Valve 1 — Fuel Filter Cap
2 — Socket Adapter
CAUTION!
Take care when handling the new fuel filter to prevent
contamination from entering the fuel system.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, approx-
imately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L).
2. Push ignition switch twice without your foot on brake
to put vehicle in RUN position. This will activate the in
tank fuel pump for approximately 30 seconds.
Repeat this process twice.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting procedure
Ú page 137.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all
the fuel lines.
NOTE:
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can nega-
tively impact the fuel filter's ability to separate water
from the fuel, resulting in high pressure fuel system
corrosion or damage.
In addition, commercially available fuel additives are
not necessary for the proper operation of your diesel
engine.
For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium Diesel
Fuel Treatment" is recommended to assist with cold
starting.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
This engine meets all required diesel engine emissions
standards. To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated
into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to
allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or
interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or engine
Ú page 113.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
The starter motor will engage for approximately
30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between
cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and be
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the use
of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and
those items that come into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by
the name of its active component, UREA, is a key
component of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent
emission regulations. DEF is a liquid reducing agent that
reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
For further information
Ú page 397.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks, that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. This is not a reason to replace the belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. In addition, have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt
body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct posi-
tion on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time regardless of
ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located online, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly
substance with a low global-warming potential. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and
lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the
cabin air filter access door to the HVAC housing.
Cabin Air Filter Access Door Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the cabin air filter from the HVAC air inlet
housing. Pull the filter elements out pinching them to
the right for clearance.
Cabin Air Filter
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands and may
propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure retaining
tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into
position, ensuring you have properly engaged the
travel dampener.
Travel Dampener
For the proper maintenance intervals see Ú page 332 for
gas engines or
Ú page 336 for diesel engines.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors, and hood hinges should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube, to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit. After lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant, directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines, or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
press the release tab on the wiper blade, and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper
blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click.
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle,
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Carbon
Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO see
Ú page 306.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and
those items that come into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized
dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT
PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals see
Ú page 332 for
gas engines or
Ú page 336 for diesel engines.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device,
may seriously reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
position. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON position.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 397.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze), other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is
different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any
“globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may clog the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) that meets the require-
ments of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water, such as distilled or deion-
ized water, when mixing the water/engine coolant solu-
tion. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact an
authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion
bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) OAT or
HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals
or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground, clean up any ground spills immediately.
If ingested, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine in the off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant only needs to be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the freezing point of the coolant in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If determined that
more engine coolant needs to be added to the radiator,
the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also
be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. With air
conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine system performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
(Continued)
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
(D
IESEL ENGINE)
The charge air cooler is positioned in front of the radiator
and the air conditioner condenser. Air enters the engine
through the air cleaner and passes through the
turbocharger, where it is pressurized. This pressurized air
rapidly reaches high temperature. The air is then directed
through a hose to the charge air cooler and through
another hose to the intake manifold of the engine. This
cooling process enables more efficient burning of fuel
resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the system, keep
the surfaces of the charge air cooler, condenser and
radiator clean and free of debris. Periodically check the
hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for cracks
or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and reduced
engine performance.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. For
the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 332.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level within the designated marks on the side of
the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean
the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks.
For further information
Ú page 399.
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected, inspect the
fluid level.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below
the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by the
axles.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level
specified above.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 399. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
WARNING!
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
Ú page 399.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 332.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
Ú page 399.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water,
it should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan
Ú page 332.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer's recommended manual
transmission fluid
Ú page 397.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
1 — Fill Hole
2 — Drain Hole
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only manufacturer's specified transmission fluid
Ú page 399. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
FUSES
General Information
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than manufacturer’s
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder
Ú page 399.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use
proper fuses may result in serious personal injury,
fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
electrical current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
an extended period of time with the engine off, it may
result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover
is labeled with each serviceable fuse/relay location,
function, and size.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
Power Distribution Center Location — Gas Engine
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location — Diesel Engine
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare*
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare*
F07 – – Spare*
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare*
F10 – 15 Amp Blue
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RFHUB)/Electric
Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare*
F14 – – Spare*
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty Electrical Pkg
(SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare*
F17 – – Spare*
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare*
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – – Spare*
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F22 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
F23 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM)
F24 – – Spare*
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare*
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/Steering
Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Driver
Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/Airbag
Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power Steering
(EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP*
F36 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Elec Brk Mod *
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W*
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – – Spare*
F40 – 15 Amp Blue Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC) FT_RR
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)*
F43 – – Spare*
F44 – 10 Amp Red Infrared Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – – Spare*
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare*
F48 – – Spare*
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC*
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Humidity Light Rain Sensor (HLRS)/Inverter 400W Wake Up/USB/
InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/Compass Module (CSGM)/DTV
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F53 – 10 Amp Red Wireless Speaker*
F54 – – Spare*
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)*
F56 – 10 Amp Red In-Car Temp Sensor/PTC Heater Coil Feed
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Drvr Htd Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Pass Htd Seat
F59 – – Spare*
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F62 – – Spare*
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare*
F65 50 Amp Red – Power Inverter 400W *
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT
F67 – – Spare*
F68 – – Spare*
F69 – – Spare*
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare*
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG*
F73 – – Spare*
F74 – – Spare*
F75 – – Spare*
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F78 – – Spare*
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Solenoid 1 2 Block Shift
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR*
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG*
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT*
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR*
F86 – – Spare*
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP*
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/#2*
F89 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/Cruise Control (CRUISE CTL)/
Digital TV (DTV)/Airbag Disable Lamp
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP*
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2*
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1*
F94 – – Spare *
F95 – – Spare*
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare*
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3*
F104 – – Spare*
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
F105 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC)
F106 50 Amp Red – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)/PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT*
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4*
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT*
F110 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 150W*
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP*
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger) **
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps H13
Premium Head Lamps LED
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7442NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps LED
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NA
Base (Overland/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443
Front Side Marker Lamps LED
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED
License Lamp LED
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the
applicable Service Manual.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric condi-
tions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions
occur to allow the condensation to change back into a
vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top a quarter turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away, starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to
the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grab the bulb and turn a quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
connector locking tab to the lock position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a quarter turn
clockwise.
NOTE:
We recommend seeing an authorized dealer for service.
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from housing. Pull the bulb
straight from the socket to replace.
NOTE:
We recommend seeing an authorized dealer for service.
LED FRONT SIDE MARKER
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access
side maker screw and electrical connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the front side
maker assembly and disconnect electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light
assembly.
FRONT FOG LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the
front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front
fog lamp connector receptacle.
3. Firmly grab the bulb by the two latch features and
squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the
back of the front fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
the housing and then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb
comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb
with rubbing alcohol.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are
replaced as an assembly.
NOTE:
We recommend seeing an authorized dealer for service.
REAR TAIL, STOP, TURN SIGNAL, AND BACKUP
LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Screws
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward, far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing, from the two
plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side
panel.
3. Once removed, locate and rotate the appropriate
socket a quarter turn counterclockwise, then remove
it from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
5. To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure above.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on the tailgate. If service is
needed, obtain the LED assembly from an authorized
dealer.
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure above. When
installing the new bulb, care should be taken to not allow
bare skin to come in contact with the bulb.
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with bead-lock wheels, please
refer to your vehicles bead-lock specific part number for
additional information and instructions on mopar.com or
by contacting an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the
lamp wiring.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter “P” is absent from this tire size
designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire, or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 181.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, see
Ú page 181.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C), and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading, and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
If equipped with Run Flat tires, and they are damaged, or
experience a loss of pressure, they should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
changed after being driven in a Run Flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section for more
information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h), or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure — Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality, and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 377. Refer to the Tire And
Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 371.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware, these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C), or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires that are
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 187.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. Refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle,
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent, is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile
Or Equivalent)
SPORT
OVERLAND
Rear 245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
RUBICON
HIGH ALTITUDE
MOJAVE
Rear
LT285/70R17C
255/70R18
275/55R20
Autosock
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 332. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 3 weeks, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize
the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system then
disconnect both the main and supplemental negative
battery cables.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started again.
If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery
system, see an authorized dealer.
Battery Cable Disconnect
NOTE:
You must isolate the supplemental battery connection
point, as well as the main battery terminal from the post,
as shown in the image, to fully de-energize both
batteries for storage. If assistance is needed to discon-
nect the battery system, see an authorized dealer.
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS), or
your Stop/Start system may not function for up to 24
hours, due to the IBS being set into learn mode.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather, and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped
with two batteries. Both the main and the supple-
mental batteries must be disconnected to
completely de-energize the 12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do not
disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly
disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it
can cause a potential power spike or surge in the
system, resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
WARNING!
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
4 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool, or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax, to remove road film and stains, and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch
the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior trim
and top, follow these precautions:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.
Window scratches and wax build-up may result.
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior
trim.
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top
material, as damage may result.
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on
the paint, leaving a streak.
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials,
such as steel wool or scouring powder, that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
(Continued)
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or mild
soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles.
If extra cleaning is required, use Mopar® Convertible Cloth
Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on
the entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing
the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow
the top to dry before lowering it.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows that
can be scratched unless special care is taken by following
these directions:
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead,
use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the
window, not up and down. Mopar® Jeep® Soft Glass
Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all the
plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protec-
tion to help prevent yellowing.
When washing,
never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with
a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
When removing frost, snow, or ice,
never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must
clean the window quickly.
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
driving will have an impact on plastic retainer opera-
tion. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing
will eventually impact window plastic retainer opera-
tion. To maintain ease of use of the window plastic
retainers, each window plastic retainer should be
cleaned and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a
mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning prod-
ucts are available through an authorized dealer.
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may
damage the windows.
INTERIORS
CARPET SAFETY INFORMATION
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
carpet that does not interfere with the operation of the
pedal assemblies. Only operate the vehicle when the
carpet is securely attached by the grommets so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains, or mildew of the top material:
Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
result.
It is recommended that the top be free of water prior
to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or
lowering a window while the top is wet may allow
water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the removable roof
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle under
trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as, when
dried, it may only be possible to remove them with
abrasive products and/or polishes, which is highly
inadvisable as they could alter the typical opaque-
ness of the paint.
Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for cleaning
the front windshield and rear window; dilute it to a
minimum of 50% water. Only use pure windshield
washer fluid when strictly necessary due to outside
temperature conditions.
CAUTION!
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CARPET REMOVAL
Front Carpets:
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for
the rear carpet and then the front carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet split
and then pull out the rear edge and slide the carpet
to the front (do not remove the harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat Carpet Split
WARNING!
If operating the vehicle without carpet in place the
floor may become hot, and there is a risk of burns.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
damaged grommets may cause your carpet to inter-
fere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach your
carpet using the grommets.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the carpet
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the carpet and may cause interfer-
ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install carpet that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If the carpet
needs to be replaced, only use manufacturer
approved carpet for the specific make, model, and
year of your vehicle.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check that the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check
for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
1 — Grommets
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket and
then remove the last two grommets.
6. When reinstalling carpet, perform these steps in
reverse order, making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, and console, and then
refasten the grommets.
Rear Carpet
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left
and one right).
Carpet Split
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the
carpet split around the front seat brackets.
3. Remove the rear Under Seat storage bin (if
equipped), by removing the four bolts that hold it to
the floor.
4. Remove the fastener bin from the rear floor, it is held
in by clips.
5. Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then lift
the assembly out from under the seat.
6. Lift carpet off of the rear retainers (one left and one
right).
Rear Retainers
7. Remove carpet from the vehicle.
8. When reinstalling the carpet, perform these steps in
reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked
under the scuffs, B-pillar, console, and then refasten
the grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric
8
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® Total Clean
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
391
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the A-pillar,
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function.
However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 mm 22 mm
9
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than recommended can cause engine failure and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
regulations and provide excellent fuel economy
and performance when using high-quality
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated
gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions
and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 393
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
law and California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Use of these blends may result in starting and
drivability problems, damage critical fuel system
components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light
to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine, certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out-of-tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of The manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with
Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur
maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway
Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to
the emissions control system.
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in
your vehicle. For most year-round service, Number 2
diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly known as the
American Society for Testing and Materials) specification
D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the
vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C),
or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions
for prolonged periods, use climatized Number 2 diesel fuel
or dilute the Number 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number 1
diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel
gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the
fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator drain
provided on the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality
fuel and follow the listed cold weather recommendations,
fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel
fuel may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up
performance.
DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
This diesel engine has been developed to take advantage
of the high energy content and generally lower cost
Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel or Number 2 Ultra
Low Sulfur climatized diesel fuels.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline or DEF
on your diesel vehicle, do not start the engine. Damage
to the engine and fuel system could occur. Please call
an authorized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-975 may be used with your diesel
engine without any adjustments to regular service
schedules.
Commercially available fuel additives are not neces-
sary for the proper operation of your diesel engine.
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
only be used where extended arctic conditions
(-10°F or -23°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D975 is recommended for use with your
diesel engine. If frequent operation with biodiesel blends
that are between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) is desired, the
maintenance schedule is subject to shorter intervals.
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter replacement
is subject to shorter intervals when operating your engine
on biodiesel greater than 5%. Do not use biodiesel greater
than 20%.
For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20) it is important that you understand and comply
with these requirements
Ú page 336.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable resources
typically derived from animal fat, rapeseed oil (Rapeseed
Methyl Ester (RME) base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester
(SME or SOME) base).
Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which require that
you understand and adhere to the following requirements
if you use blends of biodiesel between 6% and 20%
(B6–B20). There are no unique restrictions for the
use of B5.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START engine before you drain the water from the fuel
filter(s) to avoid engine damage
Ú page 345.
CAUTION!
Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements for
vehicles operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and
20% (B6–B20) will result in premature engine wear.
Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 395
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both storage
and operation. Precautions can be necessary at low
ambient temperatures, such as storing the fuel in a
heated building or a heated storage tank, or using cold
temperature additives.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only fuel
produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the following
specifications may be blended to meet biodiesel blend
B6 – B20 fuel meeting ASTM specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975
and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM specification
D-6751
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which can result
in long term storage problems. Fuel produced to approved
ASTM standards, if stored properly, provides for protection
against fuel oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar® Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and water
accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar® filtration
system is designed to provide adequate fuel water
separation capabilities.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed with the
use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not exceed 5%.
To ensure this limit is met your oil change interval must be
maintained within the suggested schedule. The regular
use of biodiesel between 6% and 20% requires intervals
shorter than the outlined 10,000 miles (16,000 km) and
must not exceed the suggested schedule. When routinely
operating on biodiesel between 6% and 20%, oil and filter
replacement intervals must not exceed 8,000 miles
(13,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel filter
change intervals. When operating on biodiesel between
6% and 20%, fuel filter replacement intervals should be
every second oil change, and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km).
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six months, if regular
operation occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Under no
circumstances should fuel filter replacement intervals
exceed every second oil change and must not exceed
16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation occurs
with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure to comply with
these Oil Change and fuel filter requirements for vehicles
operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in
premature engine wear. Such wear is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The engine may suffer
severe damage if operated with concentrations of
biodiesel higher than 20%.
CAUTION!
Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved.
Use of blends greater than 20% can result in engine
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
In the event that the vehicle is filled with biodiesel and
not used for more than a month, the fuel should either
be used up by driving (up to quarter tank) and filled with
standard diesel blends with less than 5% that is
normally available. This will help prevent the fuel filter
clogging and potential damage to the fuel injection
system due to degraded biodiesel, which is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 22.0 gal 83.0 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Gasoline Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System *
3.6L Gasoline Engine 13.0 qt 12.3 L
*Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Diesel Engine 19.0 gal 72.0 L
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.1 gal 19.3 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Diesel Engine 9.0 qt 8.5 L
Cooling System
3.0L Diesel Engine 14.5 qt 13.7 L
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 397
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Gasoline Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic
SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark
Ú page 342.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Gasoline Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may clog the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
9
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized Number 2 diesel fuel or
dilute the Number 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12991. Equivalent
full synthetic SAE 5W-40 engine oil can be used but must be compliant to API SN/SP and
ACEA A3/B4 specifications
Ú page 342.
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Diesel Engine
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating.
Using a fuel filter
that does not meet the manufacturer filtration and water separating requirements can
severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law
requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm
Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm
Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system. For most year-round
service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM
specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than
20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance
intervals are followed as directed.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid — 3.0L Diesel Engine
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)(API Certified) or equivalent that has been API
Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may
result in system damage.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 399
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure
to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Differential We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5). Models
equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
9
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services
are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
Oaks, CA 91360.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 401
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as
a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival.
If you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us
know. With your consent, we will contact local police or
safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and
customary charges for that service in the area where they
were provided.
FCA US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by
FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a
12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
10
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
I
SLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 403
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts and accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
10
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
405
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ....................................................... 391
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.................................. 348
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control).......... 160
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 353
Adding Fuel..........................................................177
, 178
Additives, Fuel.............................................................. 392
Advance Phone Connectivity ....................................... 236
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 286
Air Bag Warning Light ...........................122
, 284, 286
Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 295
, 330
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 330
Front Air Bag .................................................. 285
, 286
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 294
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 292
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 295
Maintenance........................................................... 295
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 285
Transporting Pets.................................................... 307
Air Bag Light ........................................................284
, 307
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 343
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 348
Air Conditioner Refrigerant................................. 348
, 349
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 348
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 61
, 349
Air Conditioning System..................................................60
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................61
Air Filter......................................................................... 343
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................376
Alarm
Arm The System......................................................... 21
Disarm The System ................................................... 21
Security Alarm............................................................ 21
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................................10
Android Auto........................................................ 238
, 239
Android Auto™
b
........................................................238
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 353
, 396
Disposal ...................................................................354
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 125
, 260
Apple CarPlay ...................................................... 238
, 241
Apple CarPlay®
b
......................................................240
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................264
Audio Settings...............................................................225
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................199
Auto Down Power Windows............................................75
Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................................47
Automatic Door Locks ....................................................25
Automatic Headlights .....................................................53
Automatic High Beams................................................... 53
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 60
Automatic Transmission...............................................145
Adding Fluid .............................................................357
Autostick ..................................................................148
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................357
Fluid Change............................................................357
Fluid Level Check .......................................... 356
, 357
Fluid Type .......................................................357
, 399
Gear Ranges............................................................146
Special Additives.....................................................356
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ...............148
AutoPark ....................................................................... 134
AUX .................................................................................. 65
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 71
Auxiliary Power Outlet .................................................... 71
Auxiliary Switches........................................................... 73
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 399
Axle Lock....................................................................... 153
B
Battery...........................................................................341
Charging System Light............................................123
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 15
Bed Lights....................................................................... 54
Belts, Seat.....................................................................307
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................................267
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ............................232
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 350
B-Pillar Location ...........................................................374
Brake Assist System..................................................... 261
Brake Control System ..................................................261
Brake Fluid...........................................................355
, 399
11
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406
Brake System ......................................................355, 391
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................ 391
Fluid Check.............................................................. 355
Master Cylinder....................................................... 355
Parking .................................................................... 141
Warning Light.......................................................... 122
Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 145
Bulb Replacement ..............................................366
, 368
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 309
, 366
Bumper End Cap Removal .......................................... 193
C
Camera, Rear ............................................................... 174
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 396
Caps, Filler
Fuel.......................................................................... 177
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 339
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 354
Car Washes .................................................................. 386
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 309
Carpet Safety Information ........................................... 387
Carpeting ...................................................................... 388
CD.................................................................................. 227
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 258
Center High Mounted Stop Light................................. 369
Certification Label........................................................ 181
Chains, Tire................................................................... 382
Charge Air Cooler ......................................................... 355
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 371
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 306
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 306
Child Restraint.............................................................. 296
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 298
Child Seat Installation.............................................305
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................302
Infant And Child Restraints.....................................297
Locating The LATCH Anchorages............................301
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............299
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................298
Seating Positions.....................................................299
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................392
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................380
Climate Control ...............................................................56
Automatic................................................................... 56
Manual .......................................................................59
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications......................393
Cold Weather Operation...............................................135
Compact Spare Tire......................................................380
Connected Services..........................242
, 243, 245, 253
Connector
UCI ..............................................................................65
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)......................... 65
Console..................................................................... 62
, 63
Floor .................................................................... 62
, 63
Contract, Service ..........................................................402
Controls .........................................................................219
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................354
Cooling System .............................................................352
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................353
Coolant Level ...........................................................354
Cooling Capacity......................................................396
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................354
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................352
Inspection ...................................................... 352
, 354
Points To Remember...............................................354
Pressure Cap...........................................................354
Radiator Cap............................................................354
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........ 353
, 396, 397
Corrosion Protection ....................................................385
Cruise Control (Speed Control)........ 129
, 130, 131, 160
Customer Assistance ...................................................400
Cybersecurity ................................................................199
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 52
Defroster, Windshield ..................................................307
De-Icer, Remote Start .................................................... 20
Deleting A Phone ..........................................................233
Diesel Exhaust Fluid............................................179
, 348
Diesel Fuel ....................................................................394
Diesel Fuel Requirements ...........................................394
Bulk Storage Of .......................................................179
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming ..................................347
Dimmer Control Switch .................................................. 55
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ................................................................... 53
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 341
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................................328
Disc Drive...................................................................... 227
Disconnecting...............................................................233
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....................................354
Disturb...........................................................................235
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles................393
Door Ajar Light.............................................................. 123
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
407
Door Frame......................................................................96
Installation .................................................................96
Removal .....................................................................96
Door Locks
Automatic ...................................................................25
Door Off Mirror Kit...........................................................31
Doors................................................................................22
Removal ..............................................................25
, 29
Removal, Front...........................................................25
Removal, Rear ...........................................................29
Drag & Drop.................................................................. 217
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ......................... 345
Driver Memory Presets ................................................ 225
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .............................................39
, 40
Driving........................................................................... 192
Driving Tips................................................................... 192
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 261
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................................... 260
Electronic Roll Mitigation ..............................261
, 267
Electric Remote Mirrors..................................................48
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......................71
Electrical Power Outlets..................................................71
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control).................. 160
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .......................125
, 262
Emergency
In Case Of................................................................ 310
SOS Emergency Call ............................................... 310
Emergency Brake ......................................................... 141
Emergency Braking ...................................................... 273
Emergency Gas Can Refueling.................................... 324
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking .....................................................................313
Jump Starting...........................................................321
Tow Hooks................................................................329
Engine............................................................................339
Air Cleaner ...............................................................343
Block Heater ............................................................136
Break-In Recommendations ...................................140
Checking Oil Level ...................................................341
Compartment................................................. 339
, 340
Compartment Identification.......................... 339
, 340
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................................397
Cooling .....................................................................352
Exhaust Gas Caution...............................................309
Fails To Start............................................................135
Flooded, Starting .....................................................135
Fuel Requirements..................................................396
Idling.........................................................................138
Jump Starting...........................................................321
Oil ..........................................................342
, 396, 397
Oil Filler Cap.............................................................339
Oil Filter....................................................................343
Oil Reset...................................................................114
Oil Selection................................................... 342
, 396
Oil Synthetic.............................................................342
Overheating .............................................................325
Starting.....................................................................133
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 295
, 330
Ethanol ..........................................................................392
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................................................309
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..................................................309
Exhaust System .................................................. 309
, 351
Exterior Lights ........................................................52
, 309
F
Fabric Care....................................................................386
Fabric Top ..................................................................... 386
Family Alerts .................................................................253
FAQ ................................................................................253
Fastener Bin ................................................................... 64
Features........................................................................245
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................343
Air Conditioning................................................61
, 349
Engine Fuel.............................................................. 345
Engine Oil........................................................343
, 397
Engine Oil Disposal .................................................343
Flashers
Hazard Warning.......................................................310
Turn Signal...............................................................309
Turn Signals....................................................368
, 369
Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 53
Flooded Engine Starting...............................................135
Fluid Capacities............................................................396
Fluid Leaks....................................................................309
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission .............................................356
Fluid Level Checks .......................................................355
Brake........................................................................355
Engine Oil.................................................................341
Fluid, Brake...................................................................399
Fog Lights......................................................53
, 129, 368
Fog Lights, Service .......................................................368
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................ 39
Folding Rear Seats......................................................... 41
Folding Windshield......................................................... 98
Forward Collision Warning..................................128
, 271
11
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408
Four Wheel Drive.......................................................... 149
Operation................................................................. 149
Shifting .................................................................... 149
System..................................................................... 149
Four Wheel Drive Operation ........................................ 151
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ............................................ 310
Freedom Panels..............................................................90
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle............................................... 327
Front Axle (Differential)................................................ 355
Front Door Removal
b
.................................................26
Front View Camera....................................................... 176
Fuel ......................................................................392
, 394
Adding.............................................................177
, 178
Additives.................................................................. 392
Clean Air .................................................................. 392
Ethanol .................................................................... 392
Filler Cap (Gas Cap).......................................125
, 177
Filter......................................................................... 345
Gasoline .................................................................. 392
Materials Added...................................................... 392
Methanol ................................................................. 392
Octane Rating ................................................ 392
, 397
Requirements ................................................394
, 396
Specifications................................................. 394
, 397
Tank Capacity.......................................................... 396
Fuel Filter Replacement .............................................. 345
Fuel System Cautions .................................................. 393
Fueling .................................................................177
, 178
Fuses ............................................................................ 357
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .................................. 48
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap).................................... 177
, 178
Gasoline Instrument Clusters
b
...............................110
Gasoline, (Fuel).............................................................392
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................................392
Gasoline, Reformulated ...............................................392
Gauges
Voltage .....................................................................137
Gear Ranges ....................................................... 143
, 146
Getting Started .............................................................243
Glass Cleaning ..............................................................390
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.............................. 182
, 183
GVWR.............................................................................181
H
Half-Door Installation .....................................................32
Half-Doors — If Equipped
b
.........................................33
Hard Top.......................................................................... 76
Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal
b
........................... 88
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................................310
Head Restraints ..............................................................44
Headlights
Automatic................................................................... 53
Bulb Replacement...................................................368
Cleaning ...................................................................386
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ......................53
Lights On Reminder..........................................53
, 129
Passing.......................................................................53
Replacing .................................................................368
Switch.........................................................................52
Heated Mirrors ............................................................... 48
Heated Seats.................................................................. 43
Heated Steering Wheel.................................................. 39
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch........... 53
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 264
Hitches
Trailer Towing ..........................................................185
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).................................. 48
Hood Prop ..................................................................... 101
Hood Release ...............................................................101
I
Ignition ............................................................................ 17
Switch ........................................................................ 17
Ignition Park Interlock..................................................145
In Case Of Emergency ..................................................310
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................... 46
Instrument Cluster
Audio ........................................................................117
Display .....................................................................113
Driver Assist.............................................................116
Engine Oil Reset...................................................... 114
Fuel Economy..........................................................117
Off Road...................................................................116
Screen Setup...........................................................117
Speedometer...........................................................116
Stop Start.................................................................117
Stored Messages ....................................................117
Trip ...........................................................................117
Vehicle Info.............................................................. 116
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................................390
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ...............................358
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
409
Interior And Instrument Lights .......................................54
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 387
Interior Lights ..................................................................54
Intervention Regeneration Strategy............................ 347
Introduction .................................................................. 242
Inverter
Power..........................................................................72
J
Jack Location................................................................ 314
Jack Operation ............................................................. 317
Jacking And Tire Changing
b
.................................... 313
Jacking Instructions ..................................................... 317
Jeep Wireless Speaker ............................................66
, 70
Charging ..............................................................67
, 68
Location......................................................................67
Pairing.........................................................................69
Resetting ....................................................................69
Speakerphone............................................................69
Waterproof Features .................................................69
Jump Starting ............................................................... 321
K
Key Fob............................................................................14
Arm The System.........................................................21
Disarm The System....................................................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........................16
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........15
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............16
Keyless Enter 'n Go™......................................................23
Passive Entry..............................................................23
Keys .................................................................................14
Replacement..............................................................16
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................................54
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................279
Latches..........................................................................309
Hood.........................................................................101
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................................309
Leather Surfaces ..........................................................390
Life Of Tires ...................................................................378
Light Bulbs .......................................................... 309
, 366
Lights.............................................................................309
4WD..........................................................................128
4WD Auto.................................................................129
4WD Low..................................................................128
4WD Part Time.........................................................128
AdBlue UREA Injection System Failure ..................128
Air Bag...................................................122
, 284, 307
Automatic Headlights................................................ 53
Axle Locker Fault .....................................................128
Bed .............................................................................54
Brake Assist Warning ..............................................263
Brake Warning.........................................................122
Bulb Replacement...................................................368
Cargo ........................................................................129
Center Mounted Stop..............................................369
Daytime Running.......................................................52
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................................53
Electronic Throttle Control ......................................123
Engine Check Malfunction Indicator ......................126
Engine Coolant Temperature..................................124
Exterior..............................................................52
, 309
Fog........................................................... 53
, 129, 368
Front And Rear Axle Lock........................................128
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................310
Headlight Switch........................................................52
Headlights.........................................................52
, 368
High Beam........................................................53
, 131
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................................. 53
Hood Open...............................................................124
Instrument Cluster .................................................... 52
Interior ....................................................................... 54
Lights On Reminder .................................................. 53
Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions Additive ................129
Low Fuel...................................................................126
Neutral .....................................................................128
Off Road...................................................................129
Oil Pressure .............................................................124
Oil Temperature ...................................................... 124
Passing ...................................................................... 53
Rear Axle Lock.........................................................128
Rear Servicing .........................................................369
Rear Tail Lamps ...................................................... 369
Seat Belt Reminder.................................................124
Security Alarm .........................................................125
Service .....................................................................368
Service 4WD............................................................126
Service Forward Collision .......................................126
Side Marker.............................................................369
StopStart..................................................................130
Sway Bar Fault ........................................................126
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..................127
, 273
Traction Control.......................................................263
Transmission Temperature .................................... 124
Turn Signal...............................................................309
Turn Signals.......................................... 130
, 368, 369
Two Wheel Drive High.............................................130
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode...................................118
Loading Vehicle ............................................................181
Tires .........................................................................374
11
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410
Locking
Axle .......................................................................... 153
Locks
Automatic Door ..........................................................25
Child Protection .........................................................25
Power Door.................................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System ........................................... 273
Lowering The Soft Top ¹...........................................77
, 80
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 350
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 391
Luggage Carrier............................................................ 107
M
Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 341
Maintenance Schedule.......................................331
, 335
Manage My Account .................................................... 253
Manual
Park Release........................................................... 325
Service..................................................................... 403
Manual Transmission .........................................142
, 356
Fluid Level Check.................................................... 356
Lubricant Selection........................................356
, 399
Shift Speeds............................................................ 143
Media Mode ................................................................. 227
Methanol ...................................................................... 392
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline .................................... 393
Mirrors .............................................................................46
Automatic Dimming ...................................................47
Electric Powered ........................................................48
Electric Remote..........................................................48
Heated........................................................................48
Outside.......................................................................47
Rearview .................................................................... 46
Vanity..........................................................................47
Mobile App ....................................................................243
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................273
Mopar Parts ..................................................................403
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period........................................140
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................277
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 392
, 397
Off Road Pages .............................................................258
Accessory Gauges ...................................................259
Drivetrain .................................................................259
Pitch And Roll...........................................................259
Status Bar ................................................................258
Off Road+......................................................................155
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................343
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................343
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped
b
..................................114
Oil Reset ........................................................................114
Oil, Engine ........................................................... 342
, 397
Capacity ...................................................................396
Checking ..................................................................341
Dipstick ....................................................................341
Disposal ...................................................................343
Filter ............................................................... 343
, 397
Filter Disposal..........................................................343
Identification Logo...................................................342
Materials Added To .................................................342
Recommendation...........................................342
, 396
Synthetic..................................................................342
Viscosity...................................................................396
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ...................................................... 403
Outside Rearview Mirrors .............................................. 47
P
Paint Care ..................................................................... 385
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
b
.. 231
Parking Brake ...............................................................141
ParkSense
Front And Rear ........................................................170
ParkSense System, Rear .............................................170
Passive Entry .................................................................. 23
Pedestrian Warning System ........................................273
Personalized Main Menu Bar ...................................... 217
Pets ............................................................................... 307
Phone Mode .................................................................229
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......................374
Power
Brakes...................................................................... 391
Door Locks................................................................. 22
Inverter ...................................................................... 72
Mirrors ....................................................................... 48
Steering ...................................................................156
Windows .................................................................... 74
Power Steering Fluid .................................................... 399
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................................282
Preparation For Jacking ...............................................313
Presets ..........................................................................225
Pressure Washing ........................................................342
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................................282
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
411
Q
Qualcomm TrueWireless Stereo ....................................69
R
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 377
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 354
Radio
Presets..................................................................... 225
Radio Controls.............................................................. 219
Radio Mode .................................................................. 219
Radio Operation .................................................. 219
, 258
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 218
Raising The Soft Top
b
................................................83
Rear Axle (Differential)................................................. 355
Rear Camera ................................................................ 174
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ....................................... 103
Rear Cross Path ........................................................... 270
Rear Door Removal ¹ ......................................................29
Rear ParkSense System.............................................. 170
Rear Seats, Stadium Position ........................................42
Recreational Towing .................................................... 190
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)................. 191
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N)............. 192
Reformulated Gasoline................................................ 392
Refrigerant.................................................................... 349
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ................................... 243
Release, Hood.............................................................. 101
Reminder, Seat Belt..................................................... 278
Remote Control
Starting System..........................................................18
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ................ 248
, 254
Remote Features, Horn And Lights............................. 249
Remote Features, Starting ................................. 248
, 255
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 21
Disarm The Alarm......................................................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................218
Remote Start (Diesel).....................................................20
Remote Start (Gas).........................................................18
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode............................................19
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features......... 19
Uconnect Settings .....................................................19
Remote Starting System .........................................18
, 20
Removable Doors .................................................... 25
, 29
Front........................................................................... 25
Rear............................................................................ 29
Removing The Hard Top
b
..........................................91
Removing The Soft Top
b
............................................86
Replacement Bulbs ......................................................366
Replacement Keys.......................................................... 16
Replacement Tires........................................................378
Reporting Safety Defects .............................................403
Restraints, Child ...........................................................296
Restraints, Head.............................................................44
Roadside Assistance .......................................... 249
, 254
Roll Over Warning ............................................................. 9
Roof Type Carrier ..........................................................107
Rotation, Tires...............................................................383
S
Safety.............................................................................217
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................307
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................309
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................403
Safety Features.............................................................217
Safety Information, Tire ...............................................369
Safety Tips ....................................................................306
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..................................................... 309
Satellite Radio .............................................................. 220
Saved Radio Stations...................................................225
Schedule, Maintenance......................................331
, 335
Seat Belt Reminder...................................................... 124
Seat Belts.............................................................278
, 307
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................281
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..................281
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.......... 281
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................283
Child Restraints.......................................................296
Energy Management Feature.................................282
Extender...................................................................282
Front Seat............................................. 278
, 279, 280
Inspection................................................................307
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................................280
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................281
Lap/Shoulder Belts.................................................279
Operating Instructions ............................................280
Pregnant Women ....................................................282
Pretensioners ..........................................................282
Rear Seat.................................................................279
Reminder ..................................... 124
, 130, 131, 278
Seat Belt Extender ..................................................282
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................282
Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 281
Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 389
Seats ............................................................................... 39
Adjustment ................................................................ 39
Heated ....................................................................... 43
Height Adjustment .................................................... 40
Rear Folding .............................................................. 39
Tilting ......................................................................... 39
11
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412
Security Alarm .................................................................21
Arm The System.........................................................21
Disarm The System....................................................21
Selec - Speed Control ......................................... 131
, 265
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)................................ 397
Send & Go ........................................................... 250
, 254
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................16
Sentry Key Replacement ................................................16
Service Assistance ....................................................... 400
Service Contract........................................................... 402
Service Manuals........................................................... 403
Settings, Audio ............................................................. 225
Shifting.......................................................................... 144
Automatic Transmission................................144
, 145
Manual Transmission ............................................. 142
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .......................................128
, 191
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .......................................128
, 192
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 279
Side Step Removal....................................................... 192
Signals, Turn...............................................309
, 368, 369
Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 220
Favorites.................................................................. 223
Replay...................................................................... 222
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ........................................................ 223
Favorites.................................................................. 223
Replay...................................................................... 222
Smart Watch................................................................. 253
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 382
Snow Tires .................................................................... 379
Soft Top ....................................................................76
, 82
Soft Top Windows ...........................................................82
SOS Call ...............................................................245
, 254
Spare Tires .................................................315
, 379, 380
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline).........................................................397
Oil .............................................................................397
Speed Control
Cancel ......................................................................161
Resume....................................................................161
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................................160
Starting................................................................ 133
, 136
Automatic Transmission ............................... 133
, 136
Button.........................................................................17
Cold Weather ...........................................................135
Engine Block Heater................................................136
Engine Fails To Start ...............................................135
Manual Transmission..............................................133
Remote.......................................................................18
Starting And Operating .................................................133
Starting Procedures............................................ 133
, 136
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines)................ 129
, 136
Steering ........................................................................... 39
Power ............................................................. 123
, 156
Tilt Column.................................................................39
Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 39
Wheel, Tilt ..................................................................39
Steering Wheel
Voice Recognition......................................................46
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................218
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....................218
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................................. 251
, 255
Stop/Start .........................................126
, 130, 156, 158
Storage ..................................................................... 62
, 82
Behind Rear Seat ......................................................64
Storage, Vehicle.....................................................61
, 384
Store Radio Presets......................................................225
Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................384
Stuck, Freeing...............................................................327
Sunrider® For Hard Top ................................................ 93
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic........................................................128
, 154
Sway Control, Trailer ....................................................267
Synthetic Engine Oil .....................................................342
System, Remote Starting............................................... 18
T
Tailgate .........................................................................101
Telescoping Steering Column........................................ 39
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 60
Three-Position Tailgate ................................................102
Tilt Steering Column....................................................... 39
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................374
Tire Markings................................................................370
Tire Safety Information ................................................369
Tire Types...................................................................... 379
Tires................................................... 309
, 375, 379, 383
Aging (Life Of Tires).................................................378
Air Pressure ............................................................. 375
Chains...................................................................... 382
Changing..................................................................313
Compact Spare........................................................380
General Information.......................................375
, 379
High Speed .............................................................. 376
Inflation Pressure....................................................376
Life Of Tires .............................................................378
Load Capacity..........................................................374
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............127
, 273
Quality Grading........................................................383
Radial....................................................................... 377
Replacement ...........................................................378
Rotation ...................................................................383
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
413
Safety..............................................................369, 375
Sizes ........................................................................ 371
Snow Tires............................................................... 379
Spare Tires ............................................315
, 379, 380
Spinning .................................................................. 377
Tread Wear Indicators............................................ 377
Wheel Nut Torque................................................... 391
To Open Hood............................................................... 101
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................................... 187
Tonneau Cover ............................................................. 104
Install....................................................................... 104
Removal .................................................................. 106
Top
Dual ............................................................................76
Hard ............................................................................76
Removable .................................................................76
Soft .............................................................................76
Tow Hooks
Emergency............................................................... 329
Towing.........................................................182
, 185, 328
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 328
Recreational............................................................ 190
Weight...................................................................... 185
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 190
Towing Tips................................................................... 189
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle ................................................................. 152
Traction Control............................................................ 267
TrailCam System .......................................................... 176
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 267
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 182
Hitches .................................................................... 185
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 187
Trailer And Tongue Weight............................185
, 187
Wiring .......................................................................188
Trailer Towing Guide.....................................................185
Trailer Weight................................................................185
Transfer Case................................................................356
Fluid..........................................................................399
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ......................... 149
, 151
Maintenance............................................................356
Transmission.................................................................145
Automatic....................................................... 145
, 356
Fluid..........................................................................399
Maintenance............................................................356
Manual .....................................................................142
Shifting.....................................................................144
Transporting Pets .........................................................307
Tread Wear Indicators..................................................377
Turn Signals ............................................... 130
, 368, 369
U
UCI Connector.................................................................65
Uconnect
Phone Call Features................................................234
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone.................................................236
Uconnect Settings ............................................19
, 199
Uconnect Phone ........................................230
, 231, 232
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................................235
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress.............................235
Bluetooth Communication Link..............................238
Call Continuation.....................................................236
Call Controls.............................................................234
Call Termination ......................................................236
Cancel Command....................................................231
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ............................232
Help Command .......................................................231
Join Calls..................................................................236
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 233
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is
In Progress .........................................................236
Managing Your Favorites........................................234
Natural Speech .......................................................230
Operation.................................................................230
Overview ..................................................................229
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone.... 231
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device ............. 232
Phonebook Download.............................................233
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................236
Power-Up..................................................................238
Recent Calls ............................................................235
Redial....................................................................... 236
To Remove A Favorite............................................. 234
Toggling Between Calls...........................................236
Touch-Tone Number Entry...................................... 235
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone..............236
Voice Command...................................................... 236
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .................. 19
, 23
Passive Entry Programming ..................................... 23
Uconnect System..........................................................215
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................383
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ........... 65
Universal Garage Door Opener (homelink®)
b
......... 48
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................................. 281
USB.................................................................................. 65
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area.......................................103
11
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................................47
Vehicle Finder......................................................250
, 255
Vehicle Health Alert ..................................................... 252
Vehicle Health Report .................................................. 252
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 391
Vehicle Loading................................................... 181
, 374
Vehicle Maintenance ................................................... 342
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations..................................10
Vehicle Notifications .................................................... 252
Vehicle Storage ..................................................... 61
, 384
Voice Command........................................... 45
, 239, 241
Voice Recognition System (VR) ...............................45
, 61
W
Warnings, Roll Over .......................................................... 9
Warranty Information ...................................................402
Washers, Windshield....................................................341
Washing Vehicle ...........................................................386
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel ..................................................... 129
, 345
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................380
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ..........................................380
Wi-Fi...............................................................................250
Wind Buffeting ................................................................76
Window Fogging..............................................................61
Window Lockout Switch .................................................75
Window Storage ............................................................. 82
Windows.......................................................................... 74
Power ......................................................................... 74
Rear Sliding ............................................................... 75
Windshield
Folding ....................................................................... 98
Windshield Defroster ...................................................307
Windshield Washers ............................................. 55
, 341
Fluid ................................................................126
, 341
Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 350
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 55
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................350
23_JT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Second Edition
23_JT_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
